uwe1 The 1998 Buick LeSabre Owner’s Manual
1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SRS” system. 2-1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle. 3- 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. 4-1 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. 5-1 Problems on the Road This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc. 6- 1 Service and AppearanceCare Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and loolung good. 7-1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. 8- 1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Buick for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-8. 9- 1 Index Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. r We support voluntary am- technician certification.
p?JCERTIFIED GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,BUICK, WE SUPPORT the BUICK Emblemand the name LESABRE are VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for This manual includes the latest information at the time it AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE was printed. We reserve theright to make changes in the EXCELLENCE product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears inthis manual. For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a Please keep thismanual in your vehicle, so it will be French Language Manual: there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you Aux propribtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new procurer un exemplaire de ceguide en franGais chez owner can use it. votre concessionaire ou au: DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1577 Meyerside Dr. Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
Litho in U.S.A. 0Copyright General Motors Corporation 1998 Part No. 25655109 C First Edition All Rights Reserved ii How to Use this Manual A I Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning h!~CAUTION: to end whenthey first receivetheir new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features These mean thereis something that could hurt and controls for yourvehicle. In this manual, you’ll you or other people. find thatpictures and words work together to explain things quickly. In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then Index we tell you what to do tohelp avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you don’t, you or A good place to look for what you need is the Index in others couldbe hurt. back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. You will also find a circle Safety Warnings and Symbols with a slash through it in this book. This safety You will find a number of safety cautions inthis book. symbol means “Don’t,” We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you “Don’t do this” or “Don’t about thingsthat could hurt you if you were to ignore let this happen.’’ the warning.
iii Vehicle Damage Warnings In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would Also, in this book you will find these notices: not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help NOTICE: avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see These mean there is something that could CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. damage your vehicle. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv Vehicle Symbols These aresome of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example, These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols are used on an for you and your lamps: your controls: warning and you may see: original battery: your passengers indicator lights: whenever your WINDSHIELD vehicle is WIPER CAUTION driven: POSSIBLE A FUSE INJURY COOLANT - TEMP - DOOR LOCK TURN PROTECT UNLOCK SIGNALS e t EYES BY BAllERY LIGHTER u SHIELDING CHARGING I-1 SYSTEM
CAUSTIC WINDSHIELD BATTERY FASTEN DEFROSTER ACID COULD SEAT BRAKE (0) CAUSE BELTS BURNS h SPEAKER WINDOW DEFOGGER cz POWER DAYTIME * WINDOW m RUNNING * ' 0 ENGINE OIL LAMPS '** PRESSURE e,FUEL SPARK OR ,111, B FLAME VENTILATING COULD FOG LAMPS FAN ANTI-LOCK (@) EXPLODE $0 BRAKES BATTERY
V fi NOTES
vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Buick and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about somethings you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2 Seats and Seat Controls 1-26 Rear Seat Passengers 1-5 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone 1-29 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children 1-9 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About and Small Adults Safety Belts and the Answers 1-32 Children 1-10 How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 1-35 Child Restraints 1- 10 Driver Position 1-47 Larger Children 1-17 Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy 1-50 Safety Belt Extender 1-18 Right FrontPassenger Position 1-50 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1-18 Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) 1-50 Replacing Restraint System Parts 1-25 Center PassengerPosition After a Crash
1-1 Seats and SeatControls This section tellsyou about the seats -- how to adjust them -- and also about recliningseatbacks and head restraints. Manual Front Seat
You can lose control of the vehicleyou if try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you Pull up on the control bar under the frontof the seat to don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it, then the vehicle is not moving. release the bar and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-2 Power Seat(If Equipped) Rear Control: Raise the rearof the seat by pushing the switch on the left. Lower the ofrear the seat by pushing the switchon the right.
RecliningFront Seatbacks .
The power seat controls are on the armrest. Front Control: Raise the frontof the seat by pushing the left sideof the switch. Push the right sideof the switch to lower the frontof the seat. To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outerof side Center Control: Move the seat forward or backward by the seat and move the seatback to where you want it. pushing the control on the frontor back. Raise the seat Release the lever to lock the seatback. Pull up on the by pushing the control on the left. Lower the seat by lever and the seat will go to an upright position. pushing the control onthe,right.
1-3 Sitting in a recmea position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their jobwhen you’re reclined like this. The shoulder belt can’t do itsjob because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries. The lap belt can’t doits job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. But don’t havea seatback reclined if your vehicle For proper protection when the vehicle is in is moving. motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. Thisposition reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-4 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells youhow to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do I with safety belts. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, (SRS), or air bag system. people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow peopleto ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat andusing a Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’twear safety belt properly. a safety belt properly. If you are ina crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured orkilled. In the same crash,you might not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properlytoo.
1-5 Your vehicle has a light Why Safety Belts Work that comes on as a reminder FASTEN to buckle up. (See “Safety When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. A BELTS Belt Reminder Light” in z!- the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll be in acrash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. .. .. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, I people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot! ... Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.
1-6 Put someone on it. Get it up to speed.Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.
1-7 Tbperson keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel... In a real vehicle, it could bethe windshield ...
a Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts-- ..and the Answers ‘.e:Won’t I be trappedin the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? I A: You could be -- whether you’re’wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if you are belted. \
Q: ’ If my .vehicle has air bags,why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags are’inmany vehicles today and will inbe most of them in the fidxue. But they are or the safety belts! supplemental systems only;so they work with
Withsafety belts, you slowdown as the vehicledoes. safety belts -- notinstead ofthem. Every ‘airbag You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, system ever offered for sale has required the use of and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that hasair safety belts make such good sense. bags, you still have to buckle up to. get the most protection. That’s true not0nly.h frontal collisions, but especiallyin side and other collisions.
1-9 &= If I’m a good driver, andI never drive far from First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your home, why should I wear safety belts? vehicle has. A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an We’ll start with the driver position. accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and Driver Position your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your This part describes the driver’s restraint system. control, such as bad drivers. Lap-Shoulder Belt Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear home. And the greatest numberof serious injuries it properly. and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 1. Close and lock the door. (65 km/h). 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) Safety belts are for everyone. so you can sit up straight. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This partis only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rulesfor smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
1-10 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. The lap partof the belt shouldbe worn low and snug.on Don’t letit get twisted. the hips, just touchingthe thighs. In a crhh, this applies 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks. force to the strong, pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt Pull up on the latch plate to make sureit is secure.If would apply force at your dbdomen.This could cause the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo Extender” at the endof this section. over the shoulder and across the chest. ‘These parts of the .Make sure the release button on the buckleis body are best able to take belt restraining forces. positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the The safety belt locksif there’s’a sudden stopor crash. safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-11 Shoulder Belt Height- Adjuster- To move. it down, squeeze the release handle and move Before you beginto drive, move the shoulder belt the height adjuster to the desired position.You can move adjuster to the height that is right for you. the adjuster' up just by pushing up on the bottomof the release handle. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to moveit down without squeezing the release handle to make sureit has locked into position. Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt.should be away from your face and neck, but not fallingoff your shoulder.
I
1-12 @ What’s wrong with this? :ON:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against yourbody.
L
A: The shoulder beltis too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection thisway.
1-13 @ What's wrong with this? 1JTI IN:
You can be seriously injured if y!!r belt is buckled in thewrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-14 What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. Ina crash, your body would movetoo far forward,which would increase thechance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-15 @ What's wrong with this? A CAUTION:
a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a isbelt twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealer tofix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-16 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle. The belt shouldgo back outof the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on you it, can damage both the belt .and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and .. the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-17 The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making quickly if they are to do their job and comply with safety belts effective is wearing them properly. federal regulations. Right Front Passenger Position Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system: To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier inthis section. The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt-- except for one thing. If youever pull the lap portionof the belt out all way,the you will engage the You can be severelyinjured or killed in a crash if child restraint locking feature.If this happens,just let the belt you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you go back all the way and start again. have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a If your vehicle has a center passenger position, be sure crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things to use thecorrect buckle when buckling your inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will not bags are 6‘supplementalrestraints” to thesafety go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the buckle belts. All air bags -- even reduced-force air for the centerpassenger position. ~ bags -- are designed to work with safety belts, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System the frontof your vehicle hits something. They (SRS) or air bag system. CAUTION: (Continued) Your vehicle has “Next Generation” reduced-force frontal air bags -- one air bag for the driver and another air bag forthe right front passenger. 1-18 CAUTION: (Con1ued) A CAUTION: , . 1
~ aren’t designedsto inflate at all in rollover, rear, 1 side or low-speed frontal crashes. And, for Childreri who are upagainst, or very close to,an unrestrajned occupants, reduced-force bagsair air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured may provide less pro$ection in frontalcrashes or killed. This is true even though your vehicle than moreforceful air bags have provided in the bas reduced-force frontal airbags. Air bags plus past. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for safety belt properly-- whether or not there’s an adults, but not for young children and infants. . air bag forthat person. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor itsair bag system is designedfor them. Young children and infantmeedthe protectionthat achild restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly inyour vehicle. To read how, see the partof this manualcalled “Children” and see the caution labelson the sunvisorsand the Air bags inflate withgreat force, faster than the right frontpassenger’s safety belt. blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. This is true even with reduced-force fmntal air bags. Safety belts help keep youin position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, evenwith air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control’of the vehicle.
1-19 There is an air bag How the Air Bag System Works readiness light on the instrument panel, which BAG shows AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.
Where are the air bags? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-20 .. .
/11 CAUTION: I I If something is betweenan occupant and an air bag, the bagmight not inflate properly or it might force the object intothat person. The.path of an inflating air bag must be keptclear. Don't put anythingbetween an occupant and anair bag, and don't eattach or put anythingon the steering.whee1hub oron or near any other air bag covering.
The right front passenger'sair bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger'sside.
i 1-21 When should an airbag inflate? What makes anair bag inflate? An air bag is designed to inflate ina moderate to severe In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed system triggers a release of gas fromthe inflator, which “threshold level.” If your vehicle goesstraight into a inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level steering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that right front passenger. it can be somewhat above orbelow this range. If your How does an air bag restrain? vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The In moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal collisions, air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not instrument panel.Air bags supplement the protection help the occupant. provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would bag should have inflated simply because of the damage not help you in many types of collisions, including to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. rollovers, rear impacts andside impacts, primarily because Inflation is determined by the angleof the impact and an occupant’s motion is not toward thoseair bags. Air how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or bags should never be regarded as anything more than a near-frontal impacts. supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-fiontal collisions.
1-22 What will you see after an air bag inflates? Air bags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey inflate, you’llneed some new parts for your air bag After an air bag inflates,it quickly deflates, so quickly system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system that some people may not even realize theair bag won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module-- the A new system will include air bag modules and steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the possibly other parts.The service manual for your instrument panel for the right front passenger’s vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts. bag -- will be hot for a short time.The parts of the bag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and too hot to touch. There will be some smokeand dust diagnostic module, which records information about coming from vents in the deflated air bags.Air bag the air bag system. The module records information inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from about the readiness of the system, when the sensors are being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it stop people activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. from leaving the vehicle. Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper servicecan mean that your air bag system won’twork properly. Seeyour dealer I for service. When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.
1-23 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle NOTICE: Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There areparts of the air bag system in severalplaces If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to right frontpassenger’s air bag, the bag may not inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your work properly. You may have to replace the air dealer and the LeSabre Service Manual have bag module in the steeringwheel or both the air information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag bag module and the instrumentpanel for the system. To purchase a servicemanual, see “Service and * right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not open or Owner Publications” in the Ir :x. break theair bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lotof water -- such as water up to the carpeting or higher -- or if water enters your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller For up to10 minutes after theignition key is can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air you start your vehicle, the damage could make the air bag can still inflate during improper service. You bags inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to can be injured if you are close to an airbag when replace the air bagsas well as the sensors and related it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are parts. If your vehicle is ever in a flood,or if it’s exposed probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to to water that soaks the carpet,you can avoid needless follow proper service procedures, and make sure repair costs by turning off the vehicleimmediately. the person performing work for you is qualified Don’t let anyone start the vehicle, even to tow it, unless to doso. the battery cables are first disconnected.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-24 Center Passenger Position
m
U
Lap Belt If your vehicle has frontand rear bench seats, someone can sitin the centerpositions.
When you sit in a center seating position,you have a lap ' safety belt, which hasno retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the' latch plateand pull it along the belt.
1-25 . . .-
Rear Seat Passengers It’s very important for rearseat passengers to buckleup! Accident statisticsshow that unbelted peoplein the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. .. ‘I Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
To make thebelt shorter, pull its free endas shown until, the belt issnug.
Buckle,, position and release it thesame way as the lap . part of a lap-shoulder belt. Ifthe belt.isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure the releasebutton on the buckle positionedis so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever hadto. Lap-Shoulder Belt The positions next to thew.indows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear oneproperly.
If the belt stops beforeit reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckleit. Pull up on the latch plateto make sure itis secure. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the beltacross you. If the belt is not long enough, “Safetysee Belt Don’t letit get twisted. Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle positioned is so you 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever hadto.
h 1-27 I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-28 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for 1 Childrenand Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guideswill provide added You can be seriously hurtif your shoulder belt is safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown too loose. In a crash, you would move forward child restraints and for small adults. When installedon a too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away shoulder belt should fit against your body. from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat.To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraintsand for smaller adults, the comfort guidesmay be installed on the shoulder belts. Here'show to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, justpush the button on the buckle. 1-29 1. Pull the elastic cord outfkom between the 'edgeof 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide guide from itsstorage clip. ,. over the belt,and insert the two edgesof the belt into the slotsof the guide.
.. . e,,,, .. 'Y ,: .t . . , .; . .,, " i, . 'I .. 2 ".:,, r. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. 4. Buckle, position and releasd the safety belt as The elastic cord must be underthe belt and the guide described in “Rear Seat Outside PassengerPositions” on top. earlier inthis section.,Make sure that theshoulder belt crosses theshoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges togetherso that you ca~take them outfrom the guides. fill the guide upward to exposeits storage clip, and then slide the guide ontothe clip. Rotate the guide and clip inward andin between the seatbackand the interior body, leaving only the loopof elastic cord exposed. 1-31 ..I. . .Children
' Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and. all.children smaller than,adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the ageind size of the traveler ,A CAUTION: changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restrsiints. In, fact, the lawin every statein the United States and,in Children who are upagainst, or very close to, any every Chadian province says children up to some age air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured' ' must be restrained while in a vehicle. or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has reduced-force frontal airbags. Air bags plus
.. lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for , i. adults, butnot for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its air bag system is designedfor them. Young.chiidren , ;' and infantsneed the protection that child a 5- restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly inyour vehicle.
i
1.
c Infants need complete support, including support forthe head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a Smaller children andbabies should always be rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash restrained in a child or infant restraint. The forces canbe distributed across the strongestpart of the instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be the right type and size for your child. A very secured in an appropriate infantrestraint. This is so young child’s hip bones are so small that a important that many hospitals today won’t release a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it newborn infant to its parentsunless there is an should. Instead, thebelt will likely be overthe infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply motor vehicle. force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries.So, be sure that any child small enough for one is alwaysproperly restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-33 ..
,I at.only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12h..(5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-1b. (UO kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold. Secure the baby in aninfant restraint. tL
!.. . -.
Never hold a baby in your-armswhile riding ina vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby ;will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash CAUTION:, (Continued)
1-34 Child Restraints Every theinfants andyoung children ridein vehicles, they should have protection providedby appropriate restraints. @ What are the different typesof add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints are availablein four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only thechild’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed madefor use in a motorvehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or positionchild-on a a continuous flatsurface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests towafd the center of the. vehicle.
1-35 / ..
e i A rear-facing infant restraint(B) positions an infant to face the rearof the vehicle. Rear-facing infant restraints are designed for infantsof up to about 20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rearso that the infant's head, neck and body can have the support they needin a crash. Some infant seats comein two parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable. c 'I
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a child upright to face forwardin the vehicle. These forward-facing restraints are designed helpto i .. I protect childrenwho are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and about26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around fouryears of age. One type,a convertible restraint,is designed to be used eitheras a rear-facing infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.
I ".. I- A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about four to eight yearsof age. It’s designed to improvethe fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster seats with shields use lap-only belts; however, booster seats without shields uselap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.
1-38 When choosing achild restraint, be sure the child Where to Put the Restraint restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that meetsit Federal Motor Accident statistics show that children are safer if they Vehicle Safety Standards. are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.We at General Motors thereforerecommend that you put your Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may child restraint in the rear seat..Neverput a rear-facing find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why: booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but thechild also has to besecured within the restraint to help reduce the chanceof personal injury. Theinstructions that come with the infant or child I restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be so if either one of these is not available. obtain a seriously injured if theright front passenger’s air replacement copy from the manufacturer. bag inflates, even though your vehicle has reduced-force frontal air bags. This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very closeto the inflatingair bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint ina rear seat. You may secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, but before you do, always move the frontpassenger seat asfar back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-39 Top Strap CAUTION: A - A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates, even though your vehicle has reduced-force frontal air bags. Never secure a chiId restraint in the center frontseat. It’s always better to securea child restraint in the rear seat. You may secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger seat, but before you do, always movethe frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go. It’s better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.
Wherever you install it,be sureto secure the child restraint properly. If your child restraint has a top strap,it should be Keep in mind thatan unsecured child restraint can move anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed,you around in a collision or sudden stop and injure peoplein can ask your Buick dealer to putit in foryou. If you the vehicle. Besure to properly secureany child want to install an anchor yourself,your dealer can tell restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. you how to do it. Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top strap, and that the strapbe anchored.
1-40 If your child restraint has a top strap, your dealer can 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lapand shoulder obtain a kit with anchor hardwareand installation portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or instructions specifically designed forthis vehicle. The around the restraint.The child restraint instructions dealer can then install the anchor you.for In Canada, will show you how. this work willbe done foryou free of charge. Or, you may install the anchor’yourself using the instructions provided in the kit. Securing a Child Restraint, in a Rear Outside Seatlt Bosition
,[
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strapif the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the childin the child restraintwhen and 3. Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed. as the instructionssay. If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’s face or 1. Put the restraint on the seat.’ neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-41
I ,.
4. Buckle the belt. Makesure the releasebutton is 5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the , you push down on the child restraint. If you're using safety belt quickly if you ever had to. a forward-facingchild restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to pushdown on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it issecure. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and letit go back all theway. The safety belt hgm fgpzjqg; CAUTION: 1 :+*.L 43 .2..I* will move freely again and be ready workto for an adult A or larger child passenger. A child in a child restraint in the cenzer front seat Securing a Child Restraint in the Center can be badly injured orkilled by the rightfront Rear Seat Position passenger air bag if it inflates, even though your vehicle has reduced-force frontal airbags. Never secure a child restraint in the center frontseat. It’s always better to secure child a restraint in the rear seat. You may secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontpassenger seat, but before you do, always movethe frontpassenger
U seat as far back as itwill go. It’s better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat. You’ll be using the lap belt.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure See the earlier part about the top strapif the child the child in the child restraint when and as the :estraint has one. instructions say.
1-43 1. Make the belt as long as possibleby tilting the latch 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is plate and pulling it along the belt. ’ positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the 5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end whileyou push down on the child restraint.If you’re using a restraint. The child restraint instructions willshow forward-facing child restraint,you may find it YOU how. helpful touse your knee topush down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-44 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to besure it is secure. A CAUTION: To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s I safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger A child in a rear-facingchild restraint canbe child passenger. seriously injured orkilled if the rightfront Securing a Child Restraint in the Right passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your Front Seat Position vehicle has reduced-force frontalair bags. This is because the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflatingair bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: as the instructions say. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far backas it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See “Seats” in the Index.) 2. Put the restraint onthe seat.
1-45 3., Pick up the latch plate, and run lap the and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around therestraint., The child restraintinstruct'ions will-showyou how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child's face or neck, put it behind the childrestraint.
5. Pull the restof the lap belt all the way-outof the retractor to set thelock. L
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever hadto. 1-46 .\ Larger Children
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor whileyou push down,on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your kneeto push down on the child restraintas you tighten thebelt. Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear thevehicle’s .safety belts. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If you htive the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear lan-shoulder a belt and To remove the child restraint,Just unbuckle thevehicle’s get the additional restraint asho&&r belt cbprovide. safety.belt and letit go back all theway. The safety belt will move freely again and be readywork to for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-47 Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in Never do this. a crash. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a people who are. crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Q.’ What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but thechild isso small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seatoutside position, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides’’ in the Index. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face orneck, you might want to place the child in the center seat position, the one that has only a lap belt.
1-48 Never do this. Here a child issitting in a seatthat has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in ... . a crash thechild might slide under thebelt. The belt’s force would then be applied righton the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portionof the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forcethe to child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-49 Safety Belt Extender Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you After a Crash should use it. If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be justfor you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them. Collision you choose. Don’t let someone elseuse it, and use it damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt only for the seat it is made to fit.To wear it, just attach it or seatparts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs to the regular safety belt. may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. Checking Your Restraint Systems If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the special Now and then, make sure thesafety belt reminder light part of the safety belt that goes through the seat to the and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and adjuster may need to be replaced. anchorages are working properly. Look forany other If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier anything that might keep a safety belt system from in this section. doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, geta new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) fi NOTES
1-51 b% NOTES
1-52 Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standardand optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument paneland the warning systems that tellyou if everything is working properly-- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2 Keys 2-32 Engine Exhaust 2-4 Door Locks 2-32 Running Your Engine WhileYou’re Parked 2-8 Remote Keyless Entry System(If Equipped) 2-33 Windows 2-13 Trunk 2-34 Horn 2-15 Theft 2-34 Tilt Wheel 2- 16 Universal Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped) 2-35 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever 2-17 PASS-Key@I1 2-40 Exterior Lamps 2-19 New Vehicle “Break-In’’ 2-42 Interior Lamps 2-19 Ignition Positions 2-46 Mirrors 2-2 1 Starting Your Engine 2-5 1 Storage Compartments 2-22 Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped) 2-53 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter 2-24 Automatic Transaxle Operation 2-53 Sun Visors 2-27 Parking Brake 2-54 Instrument Panel 2-28 Shifting IntoPARK (P) 2-56 Instrument Panel Clusters 2-3 1 Shifting Outof PARK (P) 2-59 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators 2-3 1 Parking Over Things That Burn Keys
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys ina vehicle with young children.
2-2 The ignition keys are forthe When a new vehicle is delivered,the dealer removes ignition only. the plugs from the keys, and gives them to the first owner. However, the ignition key may not have a plug. If the ignition key doesn’t have a plug,it will have a bar-coded key tag. Each plug or tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.Keep the plugs or the tags in a safe place.If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to havenew ones made easily using these plugs or the tag. If your ignition keys don’t have plugs or the tag, goto your dealer for the correct key code if you need a new ignition key.
The door keys are ror the I 1 doors and all other locks. I NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lotof trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicleto get in. So be sure you have extra keys.
2-3 Door Locks From the outside, use your door key or remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped). With your door key, turning the key toward the rearof the vehiclewill lock the door. Turning the key toward the front of the vehicle r will unlock it. Unlocked doors canbe dangerous. If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system and it is activated, unlock the doors only with the key or Passengers -- especially children -- can easily remote keyless entry system. This will avoid setting open the doors andfall out. When a door is off the alarm. locked, the inside handle won’t open it. Outsiders can easily enter throughan unlocked To lock the door from the inside, slidethe manual door when you slow down or stop yourvehicle. door lock control on the This may not beso obvious: You increase the door down.To unlock the chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a door, slide the manual door crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts lock control up. properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
There areseveral ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
2-4 Power closed again, it will not lock automatically. Just use the manual or power lock to lock the door again. 1 With power door locks, If you need to lock the doors before shifting out of you can lock or unlock PARK (P), just use the manual or powerlock button all the doors of your to lock the doors. vehicle using the driver’s or front passenger’s door Personal Choice Programming lock switch. If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry, you can program thememory door locks featureto change to the following modes: ModeOperation 0 No automatic door lock orunlock. All doors automatically lock when shifted The switch on each rear doorworks only that door’s out of PARK (P). No automatic doorunlock. lock. It won’t lock (or unlock) all of the doors -- that’s a 2 All doors automatically lock when shifted safety feature. out of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door Memory Door Locks automatically unlocks when shifted into PARK (P). Close the doors and turn on the ignition. Every timeyou move the shift lever out of PARK (P), all of the doors 3 All doors automatically lock when shifted will lock. And, every timeyou stop and move the shift out of PARK (P). All doors automatically lever into PARK (P), the doorswill unlock. If someone unlock when shifted into PARK (PI. needs to get out while you’re not in PARK (P), have that person use the manual or power lock. When the dooris Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 3. Use the following procedure to changemodes: Delayed Locking(If Equipped) 1. Close all the doors and turn the ignition on. Keep all This feature lets the driver delay the actual loclung doors closed throughout this procedure. of the vehicle. When the power door lock switch is 2. Press and hold LOCK on the driver’s power door pressed with the key removed from the ignition, and lock switch through Step 4. the driver’s door open, a chime will sound three times to signal that delayed locking is active. When all doors 3. Press theLOCK button on the remote keyless entry have been closed, the doors will lock automatically transmitter. The automatic door locks will remain in after five seconds. If any door is opened before this, the the current mode. five-second timer will reset itself once all the doors have 4. Press the LOCK button on the transmitter again. been closed again. Each time the transmitter’s LOCK button is pressed, Pressing the door lock switch twice within two seconds the mode will advance by one, going from 3 to 0 to will override this feature. 1, etc. Personal Choice Programming Note: The door lockswill cycle according to the mode entered while customizing the memory door The delayed locking feature canbe turned on or off locks. (Mode “0” has no feedback.) for each remote keyless entry transmitter. Vehicles are delivered with each transmitter defaulted with delayed 5. Release the power door lock switch. The automatic door lockswill remain in the most locking off. recent mode selected. To turn the feature on: 1. Press and hold LOCK on the driver’s power door lock switch throughout this procedure. All the doors will lock.
2-6 2. Press the UNLOCK button on the transmitter. Rear Door SecurityLock The lock delay is still off and all doors will remain locked. Your vehicle is equipped 3. Press the UNLOCK button on the transmitter again. with rear door security Lock delay is now active and all doors will unlock. locks that help prevent passengers from opening 4. Release the power door lock switch. the rear doors of your To turn this feature off, repeat the previous procedure. vehicle from the inside. If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry, the delayed locking feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure: 1. With the ignition on, press and hold LOCK on the driver’s power door lock switch. All doors will lock. 2. Cycle the headlamp switch four times. On the third To use one of these locks: cycle, the doors will lock if the feature is now off, or will unlock if the feature has beenturned on. 1. Open one of the rear doors. 3. To change modes, cycle the headlamp switch once 2. Move the lever located on the door edge, all the more. A lockingaction will confirm the new mode. way up to the ENGAGED position. 4. Release the power door lock switch. 3. Close the door. To turn the feature off, repeat the previous procedure. 4. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock. This procedure changesthe mode for only the transmitter used to change thissetting. The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter.
2-7 The rear doors of your vehicle cannot beopened from Leaving Your Vehicle the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on: If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out 1. Unlock the door. and close the door. Or, youmay also use the LOCK 2. Then open the door fromthe outside. button on the remote keyless entry transmitter after shutting the doors. If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or older children who ride in the rear seat won’t be able to If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system, see open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults “Universal Theft-Deterrent” in the Index. and older children know how these security locks work, and how to cancel the locks. Remote Keyless Entry System (If Equipped) To cancel the rear door lock: 1. Unlock the door and open the door from the outside. If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and 2. Move the lever all the way down. unlock your doors or 3. Do the same for the other rear door. unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to The reardoor locks will now work normally. 30 feet (9 m) away using Lockout Protection the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with The power door locks will not work if the key is left your vehicle. in the ignition with the driver’s door open. You can override this feature by holding the power door lock switch for morethan three seconds, unless the engine is running.
2-8 Your remote keyless entry system operateson a radio Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour frequency subject to Federal Communications vehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada. or snowy weather. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. 0 Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may Operation is subject to the following two conditions: be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. and (2) this device must acceptany interference If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a received, including interferencethat may cause qualified technician for service. undesired operation. This device complieswith RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The driver’s doorwill unlock when UNLOCK (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this is pressed. device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation of If UNLOCK is pressed again within five seconds,all the device. doors will unlock. Pressingthe UNLOCK button will also illuminatethe interior lamps. See “Illuminated Changes or modifications to this system by other than an Entry” in the Index. authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment. All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed. This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet The trunk will unlock when the trunk symbol is pressed (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This when the ignition is inOFF. The trunk symbol will is normal for any remote keyless entry system.If the also work when the ignition is on, but only while in transmitter does not work orif you have to stand closer PARK (P). to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, trythis: Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions that follow. Instant Alarm Personal Choice Features When the button with the horn symbol on the remote The following list of features that are available on your keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound vehicle can be programmed to each driver’s preference and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to one for each of the key transmitters. minute. This can be turned off by pressing the instant 0 Memory Door Locks: This featureprograms your alarm button again or by turning the ignition on. If your door locks to automatically lock orunlock when vehicle is equipped with the Universal Theft-Deterrent shifting in and out of PARK (P). feature, you may also turn off the instant alarm by unlocking the vehicle with a key. 0 Security Feedback: This featureprovides feedback to the driver when the vehicle receives a command Resynchronization from the remote keyless entry transmitter. If only the instant alarm works, the transmitter needs to 0 Delayed Locking: This featurelets the driver delay be resynchronized to the receiver. Do this by pressing the actual locking of the vehicle. When all doors and holding both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at have been closed, the doors will lock automatically the same time for about eight seconds. You must be after five seconds. within range of the vehicle. 0 Perimeter Lighting:When the UNLOCK button Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the horn on the key transmitter is pressed, the headlamps, will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once. The parking lamps, back-up lamps and cornering lamps system should now operate properly. will turn on. For more detailed information and programming instructions, refer to the Index for each individual feature listed above.
2-10 Security Feedback ModeSecurity Feedback This feature provides feedback to the driver when the 5 Headlamps, parking lamps and cornering vehicle receives a command from the remotekeyless lamps (if equipped) flash and horn chirps entry transmitter. One of the following modesmay be when locking; headlamps, parking lamps and selected for each transmitter: cornering lamps (if equipped) flash when ModeSecurity Feedback unlocking vehicle. 0 No feedback when locking or Feedback will be provided according to the mode that unlocking vehicle. has been selected. 1 No feedback when locking; headlamps, Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 5. To parking lamps and cornering lamps (if change to another mode: equipped) flash when unlocking vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 2 Headlamps, parking lamps and cornering 2. Press and hold LOCK on the driver’spower door lamps (if equipped) flash when locking; lock switch. no feedback when unlocking vehicle. 3. Press the trunk button on the transmitter. The 3 Headlamps, parking lampsand cornering transmitter will remain in its current mode. lamps (if equipped) flash when locking and unlocking vehicle. 4. Press the trunk button again. Each time the trunk button is pressed, the transmitter will advance to 4 Headlamps, parking lampsana cornering the next mode. lamps (if equipped) flash and horn chirps when locking; no feedbackwhen 5. Release the power door lock switch. unlocking vehicle. This procedure changes the mode for only the transmitter used to change this setting. The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter.
2-11 Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches thereplacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can haveonly four transmitters matched to it. See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle. Battery Replacement For battery replacement, use one Duracell@battery, type Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless DL-2032, or a similar type. entry transmitter should last about twoyears. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t I NOTICE: I work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close toyour vehicle before the transmitter works, When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch it’s probably time to change the battery. any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.
2-12 To replace thebattery: Trunk I. Insert a coin intothe notch near the key ring. Turn the coin to the left (counterclockwise) to separatethe Trunk Lock Release two halves of the transmitter. To unlock the trunk from the outside,insert the door key 2. Once the transmitteris separated, use apencil eraser and turn it to the right. to remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. Remote Trunk Release 3. Remove and replace the battery. Replace it as the instructions inside the cover indicate. The TRUNK releasebutton is on the instrument panel 4. Snap the transmitter back togethertightly to be sure to the left of the steering no moisture can enter. column. The transaxle 5. Resynchronize the transmitter by pressingand must be inPARK (P) or holding the LOCKand UNLOCK buttons for NEUTRAL (N). about eight seconds.You must be within range of the vehicle. When the transmitterhas been resynchronized, the horn will chirp and the headlamps, parking lampsand cornering lamps (if equipped) will flash once.
If the remote trunk release button does not open the trunk, make surethe remote trunk release lockout switch in the glove box is in the on position.
2-13 Trunk Lid The trunk release lockout switch in the glovebox must be on forthe TRUNK button to work. This feature allows you to secure items It can bedangerous to drivewith the trunk lid in the trunkwhen you must open because.carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
leave the ignition key with come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell ~ an attendant. CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drivewith the trunklid open or if electrical wiring or othercable connections must pass through theseal between the body and the trunk lid: To secure the trunk, turn off the TRUNK RELEASE, Make sure all windows are shut. lock the glovebox, then take the door keywith you. 0 Tbrn the fanon your heatingor cooling Now the trunk button to the left,of the steering column system to its highest speed withthe setting will not open the trunk. on VENT. That will force outside air into Trunk Security Override your vehicle. See.“Comfort Controls” in the Index. The remotekeyless entry transmitter (if equipped), will If you have air outlets on or under the open thetrunk even if the trunk release lockoutswitch instrument panel, open them all theway.. is in OFF. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-14 b Theft Parking Lots Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. If you park in a lot where someone will be watching Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. features, we know that nothing we put on it can make But what if you have to leave your ignition key? it impossible to steal. However, there areways you e If possible, park in a busy, well lit area. can help. e Put your valuables in a storage area, like your Key in the Ignition trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the storage area. If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside,it’s an easy target for joyriders or professional thieves -- so e Close all windows. don’t do it. 0 Turn off the TRUNK RELEASE lockout in the With the ignition off and the driver’s door open,you’ll glove box. hear a chime remindingyou to remove your key from e Lock the glove box. the ignition and take it with you. Always dothis. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition e Lock all the doors except the driver’s. and transaxle. And rememberto lock the doors. 0 Then take the door key and remote keyless entry Parking at Night transmitter (if equipped) with you. Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keepyour valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or takethem with you.
2-15 Universal Theft-Deterrent If the SECURITY light comes on for oneminute and then shuts off while the ignition is on, the security (If Equipped) system has detected a problem with itself. See your If your vehicle has dealer for service. this option, it has a If a door or the trunk is opened without the key or theft-deterrent alarm remote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. SECURITY system. With this system, It will also go off if the trunk lock is damaged. Your the SECURITY light will vehicle’s lamps will flash and the horn will sound for flash as you open the door one minute, and then will go off in order to save (if your ignition is off). battery power. Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent you lock the doors with a key or manual door lock. It system when leaving your vehicle. activates only if you use a power door lock switch with Activating the system: a door open, or the remote keyless entry transmitter. You should also remember that you can start your vehicle 1. Open the door. with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set 2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch while off. You must still shut off the alarm by inserting the key the door is open, or with the remote keyless entry in the door lock, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on transmitter. The SECURITY light should turn on and the remote keyless entry transmitter. stay on. 3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY light goes off.
2-16 Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident: If the alarm does not sound when it should,but the vehicle’s lamps flash,check to see if the horn works. 0 If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see system, lockthe door by using the door key orthe “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. manual door lock switch. If the alarm doesnot sound or the vehicle’s lamps do not 0 Always unlock a door with key,a or use the remote flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an authorized keyless entry system transmitter. Unlocking a door service center. any other way will set off the alarm. If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door PASS-Key@I1 with your key. Your vehicle is equipped You can also turn off the alarm by using the remote with the PASS-Key I1 keyless entry transmitter, if you have it. The alarm won’t (Personalized Automotive stop if you try to unlock a doorany other way. Security System) theft-deterrent system. Testing the Alarm PASS-Key I1 is a passive 1. From inside thevehicle, roll down the window. theft-deterrent system. It works when you insert 2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the or remove the key from power door lock switch whilethe door is open, or the ignition. with the remote keyless entrytransmitter. 3. Get out of the car, close the doorand wait for the SECURITY light togo out. 4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key with the manual door lockand open the door. This that matches a decoderin your vehicle. should set off the alarm.
2-17 When thePASS-Key I1 system senses that someone is If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work. The and fuel systems.For about three minutes, the starter SECURITY light will flash. Butyou don’t have to wait won’t work and fuel won’t go tothe engine. If someone three minutes before trying another ignition key. tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the during thistime, the vehicle will not start. This PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made. discourages someone fromrandomly trying different keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light turns make a match. on and stays on,you will be able torestart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key I1 system, however, The ignitionkey must be clean and dry before it’s is not working properly and must be serviced by inserted inthe ignition or the enginemay not start.If the your dealer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the engine doesnot start and. the SECURITY lightturns on, PASS-Key I1 system. the key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off. If you lose or damage a PASS-Key I1 ignition key, see Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and try your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key I1 again. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears to have a new key made. In an emergency, call the to be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and try Buick Premium Roadside Assistance Center at another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to 1-800-252- 11 12. In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800. check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first ignition key may be faulty. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key 11.
2-18 New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn NOTICE: the switch to five different positions.
Your vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate C “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: 0 Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or slow -- for the first500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttlestarts. 0 Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During thistime your new brake linings aren’t yet broken A t E in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings. 0 Don’t tow a trailer duringbreak-in. ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things See “Towing a Trailer’’ in theIndex for like the radioand the windshield wipers when the more information. engine is off. To use, push in thekey and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key.
2-19 \ .. I,
.. - LOCK (B): This is theonly position in which you can remove thekey. This position locks your , NOTICE: ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. If your key seemsstuck inLOCK and you can’t OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but turn it, be sure you are using the correctkey; if still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock thesteering so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the wheel likeLOCK &d it doesn’t send any electrical ’ steering wheel left and &ht while you turn the power to theaccessories. Use OFF if you must have key hard. But turn thekey only withyour hand, your vehicle in motion whilethe engine isnot running. Using a tool to forceit could break thekey or the RUN 0):The switch returns to thisposition after you ignition switch.If none of this works, then .your start your engine and release thekey. This is the position vehicle needs service. for normaldriving. Even when the engine isnot running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical power accessories and todisplay some instrument panel Key Reminder Warning warning lights. , If you leave yourkey in the ignition, inOFF, you will START (E): This position starts your engine. Whenthe hear awarning chime when you open the driver’s door. engine starts,release the key and theswitch will move Always leave ‘yourkey in LOCK. If you leave itin any to RUN. other position, you will drain your battery power. Starting Your Engine Starting Your 3800 Series I1 Engine Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL(N). 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal,turn your Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your use NEUTRAL (N)only. engine gets warm.
NOTICE: NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your Buick is Holding your key in START for longer than moving. If you do, you could damage the 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to transaxle. Shiftto PARK (P) only when your be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat vehicle isstopped. can damage your starter motor.
2. If it doesn’t startright away, hold your key in START for about three to fiveseconds at a time until your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2-21 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) stops), it could beflooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five orsix seconds. / This clears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, youcould change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical In very cold weather, 0”F (- 18 O C)or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and equipment, check with your dealer. If youdon’t, better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, your engine might not perform properly. the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see four hours prior to starting your vehicle. the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2-22 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 4. Before starting the engine, be sure tounplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from 1. Turn off the engine. moving engine parts.If you don’t, it couldbe 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. damaged. 3. Plug it intoa normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in thearea where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can giveyou the best advice forthat 1 Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet particular area.
~ could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord intoa properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-23 Automatic Transaxle Operation
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). Your automatic transaxle has a shiftlever located on the See “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in theIndex. If steering column. you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towinga Trailer” PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s in the Index. the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range before starting the engine. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle L LA UTION: Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. maintain brake application. Then move the shiftlever CAUTION: (Continued) into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this part.
2-24 REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ - .-= ~~~~ ~ NOTICE: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUT-,kL (N) Shifting to REVERSE (R) whileyour vehicle is while your engine is “racing” (running at high moving forward could damage your transaxle. speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on Shift toREVERSE (R)only after your vehicle the brakepedal, your vehicle could movevery is stopped. rapidly. You could losecontrol and hitpeople or objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sandwithout damaging your transaxle, see “Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” the in Index. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re I NOTICE: already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-25 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(a): This position is SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, lower fuel economy than THIRD (3).You can use and you’re: SECOND (2)on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your also want to use your brakes off and on. accelerator pedal about halfway down. Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the I i accelerator all the way down. I NOTICE: You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
~ Don’t drive in SECOND(2) for more than THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal 5 miles (8 km), or at speeds over55 mph driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel (90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@). Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(03) or Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) THIRD (3) as much as possible. instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0): Don’t shift into SECOND(2) unless you are When driving on hilly, winding roads going slower than65 mph (105 kd),or you When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting can damage your engine. between gears When going down a steep hill
. 2-26 FIRST (1): This position gives you evenmore power Parking Brake (but lower fuel economy)than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. This vehicle has a PUSH If the selector leveris put in FIRST (l),the transaxle TO RELEASE parking won’t shift into first gearuntil the vehicle is going brake pedal. To set the slowly enough. parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push I NOTICE: down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light Also, if you stop when goinguphill, don’t hold will turn on and a single chimewill be heard. The your vehicle there with only the accelerator parking brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels. pedal. This could overheat and damage the To release theparking brake, hold the regular brake transaxle. Use your brakes orshift intoPARK (P) pedal down and push the parking brake pedal with to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. your left foot. This willunlock the pedal. When you lift your left foot,the park brake pedal will follow it to the released position. If you try to drive approximately 40 feet (12.2 m) with Shifting Into PARK (P) the parking brake on, the brake light stays on and a chime sounds until you release the parking brake.
I NOTICE: 1 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if Driving with the parking brakeon can cause the shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with the your rear brakes tooverheat. You may have to parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. If replace them, and you couldalso damage other you have left the engine running, the vehicle can parts of your vehicle. move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keepthe trailer from moving. Trailer’’ in theIndex.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.
2-28 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
0 Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 0 Pull the lever toward you. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignitionkey in your hand, your vehicle is inPARK (P). Leaving Your Vehicle With the Torque Lock Engine Running If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called“torque lock.” To It can be dangerousto leave your vehicle with the prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift engine running.Your vehicle could move into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK(P) seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out overheat and even catch fire.You or others could of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another engine running unless you haveto. vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). If you have to leaveyour vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, seeif you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-30 Shifting Out of PARK (P) Parking Over Things That Burn Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “AutomaticTransaxle” in the Index. If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever -- push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever intothe gear you want. If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the key to OFF. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drivegear you want. I 5. Take your vehicle to an authorized service center as soon as you can. 1 Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.
2-31 Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You’re Parked It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are somethings to know. Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: Idling theengine with the climate control Your exhaust system sounds strange system off could allowdangerous exhaust into or different. your vehicle (seethe earlier Caution under Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. “Engine Exhaust”). 0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly Your vehicle was damaged when driving over carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even high points on the road or over road debris. if the fanswitch is at the highest setting. One Repairs weren’t done correctly. place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with Your vehicle or exhaust system had been CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a modified improperly. garage with the engine running. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See your vehicle: “Blizzard” in the Index.) Drive it only with all the wmows down to blow out any CO; and Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-32 It can bedangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, evenwhen you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shiftlever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper stepsto be sure yourvehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you are parking ona hill and if you’re pulling a Switches on thedriver’s armrest control eachof the trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. windows while the ignition is on. In addition, each passenger door hasa switch for its own window. Express-Down Window Tilt Wheel The switch for the driver’s window has an express-down feature. Pullthe switch back all the way, release it and the window will lower automatically. To stop the window from lowering, pull the switch again. To partially open the window, pull the switch back and quickly release it. To raise the window, hold the switch forward. Window Lock Press the LOCK switch on the driver’s armrest to disable all passenger window switches. The driver’s window controls will still be operable. This is a useful feature when you have children as passengers Press the UNLOCK switch to allow passengers to use their window switches again. A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering Horn wheel before you drive. Nearly the entire surfaceof the center pad of the You can also raise it to the highest level to give your steering wheel is an active horn switch. Press legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. anywhere on the pad to sound the horn. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
2-34 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Indicator The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you I to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all theway up or down. When theturn is finished, the lever will return automatically. An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change,just raise or lower the lever The lever on the left side of the steering column until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you includes your: complete your lane change. The leverwill return by itself when you release it. 0 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator If the arrows just stay on and don’t flash as you signal 0 Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer and a turn or a lane change, a signal bulbmay be burned Passing Signal out and other drivers won’t see yourturn signal. 0 Windshield Wipers and Washer If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an CruiseControl accident. If the arrows don’t goon at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs. lbrn Signal On Chime Windshield Wipers If your turn signal isleft on for more than 314 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever to the off position. Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam or highbeam to low beam, pull the turn signal lever toward you and release it. When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel will also be on.
The windshield wipers are controlled by turning the band marked WIPER. For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle.If you want more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.
2-36 For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the band to OFF. In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until The wiper speedmay be set for a long or short delay the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer between wipes. This can bevery useful in light rain or fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter thedelay. your vision. Heavy snow or ice can overloadyour wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motoruntil it cools. Cruise Control Clear away snow or ice to preventan overload. With cruise control,you can Keep in mind that damaged wiperblades may prevent maintain a speed of about you from seeing well enough to drivesafely. To avoid 25 mph (40 km/h) or more damage, be sureto clear ice and snow from the wiper without keeping your foot blades before using them. If your blades do become on the accelerator. This can damaged, getnew blades or blade inserts. really help on long trips. Windshield Washer At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, there’s a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle for lessthan a second. The wipers will clear the window and either Cruise control does not work at speeds below about stop or return to your preset speed. For morewasher 25 mph (40 km/h). cycles, push and hold the paddle. When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off. Setting Cruise Control
I Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, If you leave your cruise control switch on when , don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button Cruise control can be dangerous on and go into cruisewhen you don’twant to. You slippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges could be startled and even lose control. Keep the in tire traction cancause needless wheel cruise control switch off until you want to use it. spinning, and you could losecontrol. Don’t use cruise controlon slippery roads. 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional 3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, release it. the cruise control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction Control System” in the Index.) When road 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on. Resuming a Set Speed then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switchR/A to briefly Suppose you set your cruise controlat a desired speed and then release it. Each timeyou,do this, your and thenyou apply thebrake. This, of course, shutsoff vehicle will go about mph kmh) faster.) the cruise ‘control.But you don’t need to reset it. 1 (1.6 The accelerate featurewill only work after you have Once you’re going about25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switchfrom ON to set the cruise control speedby pushing theSET button. WA (resume/accelerate) briefly. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control You’ll go right backup to your chosen speed and There are two ways to reduce your speed while using stay there. Remember thatif you hold the switch at cruise control: R/A longer, the vehicle will keep going faster untilyou release the switchor apply thebrake. So unless you 0 Push in the SETbutton at the endof the lever until want to go faster,don’t hold the switch atWA. you reach the lower speedyou want, then release it. 0 To slow downin very small amounts, push the Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control SET buttonbriefly. Each timeyou do this, you’ll There are two ways to go to a higherspeed: go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. 0 Use the accelerator pedal to getto the higherspeed. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Push the SET button atthe end of the lever, then release the buttonand the acceleratorpedal. You’ll Use the accelerator pedalto increase yourspeed. When now cruise at the higher speed. you take your footoff the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier. 0 Move the cruise switch fromON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and
.. 1. .I
2-39 Using Cruise Controlon Hills Exterior Lamps How well your cruise controlwill work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. Headlamps When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the These switches control accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going these systems: downhill, you may have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the brake or shifting Headlamps into a lower gear will take you out of cruise control. If Taillamps you need to apply the brake or shift to a lowergear due to the grade of the downhill slope, you may not want to Parking Lamps attempt to use your cruise control feature. License Lamps Ending Cruise Control SidemarkerLamps There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: Instrument Panel Lights Step lightly on the brake pedal; or Move the cruise switch to OFF. Press the LIGHTS switch to turn on the headlamps. Press it again to turn them off. When the headlamps are Erasing Speed Memory turned on, the instrument panel lights will also turn on. The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be When you turn off the cruisecontrol or the ignition, adjusted with the PANEL LIGHTS switch to the left of your cruise cqn&~lset speed memory is erased. the steering column. Some lights will not dim during daylight hours. Press the PARK switch to turn on the parking lamps. Press it again to turn them off. (If the parking lamps were turned on with the PARK switch, they must be turned off with that switch). 2-40 Lamps On Reminder When the DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps will be on. Theparking lamps, taillamps, sidemarker If you leave the manual headlamp or parking lamp and other lamps won’t be on.Your instrument panel switch on, remove thekey from the ignitionand open lights won’t be on either. the driver’s door, you will hear a continuous warning chime. The chimewill turn off when the lamps are When it is dark enough outside, your low-beam turned off. headlamps will come on. The other lampsthat turn on with your headlamps will also turn on. When it is Daytime Running Lamps bright enough outside,the regular lamps will go off, Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) can make it easier for and your high-beam headlamps change tothe reduced others to see the frontof your vehicle duringthe day. brightness of DRL. DRL can be helpful in many different driving To turn off all exterior lighting at night when you are conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the parked, turn off the headlamps and move the twilight short periods after dawn and before sunset. sentinel control all the way toward MIN. The exterior A light sensoron top of the instrumentpanel monitors lamps will turn back on automatically when you move the exterior light level for the operationof DRL and the transaxle out of PARK (P). twilight sentinel, so be sure itisn’t covered. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular The DRLsystem will make your high-beam headlamps headlamp system when you need it. turn on at reduced brightnessin daylight when: Cornering Lamps(If Equipped) The ignition is on, The cornering lamps are designed to turn on when you 0 The headlamp switch is off and signal a turn. This will provide more lighting when cornering at night. 0 The transaxle is not in PARK (P).
2-41 Twilight Sentinel Light Sensor Twilight sentinel turns your Your twilight sentinel and lamps on and off by sensing DRL work with the light how dark it is outside. sensor ontop of the instrument panel. Don’t cover it up. If you do, the sensor will read “dark” and the headlamps will turn on.
To operate it, leave the lamp switch off. Interior Lamps If you move the control all the way to MAX, your Instrument Panel IntensityBrightness Control headlamps will remain on for threeminutes after you turn off your engine. As you move the control toward The instrument panel MIN, the headlamps will turn off more quickly when intensity can be adjusted by you turn off your engine. You can change this delay time moving this lever between from only a few seconds to three minutes. LO and HI. The instrument panel lights will be on The exterior lamps can be completely shut off while only when the headlamps the vehicle is in PARK (P) by sliding the twilight are on. Theinterior courtesy sentinel control all the way toward MIN, and release. lamps can be turned on by To turn the exterior lamps back on, slide the control sliding the lever all the all the way toward MIN again, and release; or, shift way to the right. out of PARK (P).
2-42 Courtesy Lamps Illuminated Entry (If Equipped) When any door is opened, several lamps go on. They Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keylessentry make it easy for you to enter and leave thevehicle. transmitter (if equipped) and the interior courtesy lamps You can alsoturn these lamps onby sliding the will turn on and stay on forup to a minute. The lamps PANEL LIGHTS switch to INT(Interior). will turn off immediately by pressing the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, starting the Delayed Entry Lighting engine or activatingthe power door locks. When you open the door, the interior lamps will turn on. When you close the doorwith the ignition off, the Perimeter Lighting (If Equipped) interior lamps. will stay on for 25 seconds or until the When the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry ignition is turned to an on position. Note that locking the transmitter is pressed, the headlamps, parking lamps, doors will override the delayed entry lighting feature back-up lamps and cornering lamps will turn on if it is and the lamps willturn off right away. dark enough outsideaccording to the twilight sentinel. Theater Dimming If your vehicle is not equipped with twilight sentinel and perimeter lightingis active, the lights willturn on whenever This feature allows for a three to five-second fadeof out the UNLOCK buttonon the transmitter is pressed. the courtesy lamps insteadof immediate turn off. Personal Choice Programming Delayed Exit Lighting This feature canbe programmed in the on or off mode With this feature, the interior lampswill turn on and stay for each transmitter. on forup to 25 seconds afteryou remove the key from the ignition. Thiswill give you time to findthe door pull To turn the feature off: handle or lock switches. 1. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure.All the doors will lock.
2-43 3. Press the instant alarm on the remote keyless entry 5. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting transmitter. Perimeter lighting remains on at this feature isnow on. time and the hornwill chirp two times. This procedure changes the mode foronly the 4. Press the instant alarm on the remote keyless entry transmitter used to change this setting. The procedure transmitter again. Perimeter lightingis disabled and will need to be repeated for the second transmitter. the horn will clmp one time. Front Reading Lamps(If Equipped) 5. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting feature is nowoff. Front seat reading lamps are turnedon or off by pressing the LAMP switch. To turn the feature on: 1. Turn the3gnition key toOFF. 2. Press and holdLOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure. All the doors will lock. 3. Press the instantalarm on the transmitter again. Perimeter lightingis now enabled and the horn will chirp one time. 4. Press the instant alaim on the transmitter again. Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the hornwill chxp two times.
2-44 Rear Reading Lamps(If Equipped) Battery Rundown Protection The lamp, switchand a coat hanger are aboveeach rear This feature automatically turns off the interior lamps, door. Slide the switch toturn the lamp on or off. if any are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is off or a dooris left open. This will keep your battery from running down. This feature also shuts off the exterior lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is OFF. You may override this feature for the exterior lamps by turning the lamps off and then back on after the ignition is turned to OFF. If you do this, the exterior lamps will stay on until you manually turn them off. If the feature is enabled for the interior and exterior lamps, all lamps should turn off at approximately the same time.
2-45 Mirrors The integral reading lamps are turned on or off by pressing the toggle switch at the bottom of the mirror. Daymight Manual Rearview Mirror These lamps are also part of the courtesy lamps With Integral Reading Lamps described earlier in this section. Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, dayhight rearview mirror. adjust themirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. The day-night adjustment allows you to When this feature is turned on, the mirror automatically adjust the mirror to avoid glare fromthe headlamps changes to reduce glare fromheadlamps behind you. A behind you. photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another photocell built into the mirror face, senses when headlamps are behind you. I 2-46 At night, when the glare is too high,the mirror will I .I. gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a few seconds). Themirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced. Mirror Operation To turn on the automatic dimming feature,press AUTO. To turn off automatic dimming,press OFF. The green indicator lightwill be illuminated when this feature is active. Time Delay When set in the MIRROR position, this mirror The automatic mirrorhas a time delay feature which automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps prevents unnecessary switching fromthe night back to behind you. A time delay featureprevents rapid the day position. This delay prevents rapid changingof changing from the day to night positions while the mirror as you drive under lightsand through traffic. driving under lights and through traffic. Cleaning the Photocells The mirror also includes an eight-point compass display in the upper right cornerof the mirror face. Use a cotton swaband glass cleaner to clean the When on, the compass automatically calibrates as photocells when necessary. the vehicle is driven. Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towelor similar with Compass (If Equipped) material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror as that may cause Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Use a rearview mirror with a compass. cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary. 2-47 Mirror Operation Compass Operation Press the COMPASS button once.to turn the compass on or off. When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the compassheading. If, after two seconds, the display does not show a compass heading(“N’ for North, for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic antennamount, magnetic note pad holder The right sideof the switch located at the bottomof the or a similar magneticitem. mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and off. To turn on the automaticdi&ng feature, press MIRROR. To turi off automatic dimming,press MIRROR again. The greenindicator light will beilluminated when this feature is active.
2-48 Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass varianceis the difference between earth’s magneticnorth and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, your compass could give false readings. To adjust for compassvariance: 1. Use the COMPASS button located at the bottom of the mirror. 2. Press and hold the COMPASS button until a zone number appears in thedisplay. 3. Find your current location and variance zone number 4. Press the COMPASS button on the bottom of the on the following zone map. mirror until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the button, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. (This is the automatic calibration mode. Drive in a circle to calibrate the mirror. See “Compass Calibration” following.)
2-49 Compass Calibration The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you can just seethe side of your vehicle when you are sitting If the letter “C” should ever appearin the compass in a comfortabledriving position. window, the mirror may need calibration. To adjust your passenger’s side mirror, sit in the driver’s The mirror can be calibrated in oneof two ways: seat and have a passenger adjust themirror for you. 0 Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction, or Power Remote Control Mirrors Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine. (If Equipped) Manual Remote Control Mirror If your vehicle has the outside power remote To adjust the driver’s mirrors, the control is side outsidemirror, rotate located on the driver’s door. the knob located on the driver’s door. The right outside mirror must be adjusted manually.
Move the switch in the middle of the control to choose the right or left mirror. Push the arrow controls in the direction you want to move themirror. Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
2-50 Automatic DimminglHeated Outside Rearview Mirror(If Equipped) I A CAUTION: If you have this feature, the outside mirrors will adjust for the glareof headlamps behind you. This feature A convex mirror can make things (like other is controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic vehicles) look farther away than they really are. electrochromic dayhight rearview mirror. See 1 If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you “Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror” earlier ’ could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your in this section. inside mirror or glance over your shoulder When you operate the rearwindow defogger, a defogger before changing lanes. also warms the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview mirrors to help clear themof ice and snow. Storage Compartments Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex Glove Box mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box. To the driver’s seat. open, liftthe latch release onthe left side of the glove box door.
2-51 Center Console Cupholder/Coinholder Inside, a cupholder flips forwardand unfolds to hold two cups. The cupholderis designed to break away should it receive excessive pressure. If it breaks away, snap the edges back into place. There is also a removable coinholder, cassette tape and compact disc storage area. Convenience Net(If Equipped) Your vehicle may have a conveniencenet. You’ll see it just inside the back wall of the trunk. Put small loads, likegrocery bags, behind the net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops. For heavier loads, store them in the trunk as far forwardas you can. You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when The armrest between the front seats opens into a storage you’re not using it. area. To open it, press the lever upward at the front edge of the armrest.
2-52 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Sun Visors The front centerand rear ashtrays may be removed for Dual Sun Visors cleaning. Hold the sidesof the ashtray and then pull the ashtray up and out. Each sun visor has two parts, so that both the windshield and door glass can be shaded at the same time. To use the dual sun visors, flip the firstvisor down and turn NOTICE: toward the window. Then, flipthe second visor down toward the windshield. Don’t put papersor other flammableobjects Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignite them,causing a (If Equipped) damaging fire. When you open the cover to either thepassenger s or driver’s visor vanity mirror, the lamps will turn on. The brightness of the lamp can be adjusted by sliding the To use a lighter, push the center all the way in and let it switch up or down. go. When itis ready, the center will pop back by itself. Pull out the entire unit to use it.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighterin with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heatingelement when it’s ready. That can makeit overheat, damaging the lighter and the heatingelement.
2-53 Instrument Panel I
2-54 1. Air Outlet 9. Glove BOX 2. Instrument Panel Intensity Control 10. Climate Control Syste'En 3. Twilight Sentinel 11. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter 4. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever 12. Ignition Switch 5. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever 13. Traction Control Button 6. Instrument ClustedGages 14. Trunk Release Button 7. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch 15. Hood Release 8. Audio System
2-55 Instrument Panel Clusters Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically. Your vehicle is equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages.
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY 1
Standard Cluster 2-56 Ibllollolollololol
8
u, 0
21 UNLEADED FUEL ONLY 0 0 uno 0 no 0
Gage Cluster
2-57 Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer (If Equipped) Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles The tachometer tells per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your you how fast the engine odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, 4 is going. It displays in either miles (used in the United States) orkilometers 3 \I/ 5 \ / engine speed in (used in Canada). 2‘ \ thousands of revolutions Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. If you see . per minute (rpm). bright silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know lz=====o that someonehas probably tried to turn it back. The RPM X 1000 numbers may not be true. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set tothe mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on NOTICE: the driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed. Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in Trip Odometer the red area or engine damagemay occur. A trip odometercan tell you how far you have driven since you last set it to zero.To reset it, push the button.
2-58 Warning Lights, Gages When one of the warning lights comeson and stays on when you are driving, or when oneof the gages shows and Indicators there may be a problem, check the section that tellsyou This part describes the warning lights and gages that what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. may be on your vehicle. The pictures will helpyou Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even locate them. dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an Safety Belt Reminder Light expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also saveyou or When the key is turned toRUN or START, a chime others from injury. will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts. Warning lights come on when theremay be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you mThe safety belt light will will see in the details on the next few pages, some also come on and stay on warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the for about 70 seconds. If the engine just tolet you know they’re working.If you are driver’s belt is already familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed buckled, neither the chime when this happens. nor the light will come on. Gages can indicate when theremay be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-59 Air Bag Readiness Light Battery System Warning Light There is an air bagreadiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checksthe air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. il For more information on the air bag system, see “Air t Bag” in the Index. Standard Cluster Gage Cluster This light will come on when you start your engine, When you turn the key to RUN, one of these lights will AIR and it will flash for a few turn on briefly, to show that your generator and battery seconds. Then the light charging systems are working. BAG should go out. This means the system is ready. If the light stays on, you need service and you should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories and If the air bagreadiness light stayson after you start the set your climate control system to OFF. engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come onthen, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-60 Voltage Gage (If Equipped) Brake System Warning Light If your vehicle is equipped Your vehicle's hydraulic brake systemis divided into two parts. If one part isn't working, the other part can II I with thegage cluster, this gage shows voltage in the still work and stop you. For good braking, though,you need both parts working well. electricalsystem. \0'' "a,/ If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. 8 18 Have your brake system inspected rightaway.
BRAKE The normal range is 11 to 15 volts. If the gage reading (a) (a! stays in either red range, or the battery warning light BRAKE turns on, have your dealer check the electrical system. I II Gage ClusterGageStandard Cluster One of these lights shouldcome on when you turn the key to START. If it doesn't come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there's a problem.
2-61 If the light and chime come onwhile you are driving, Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer With the anti-lock brake to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still system, the light(s) will on, have thevehicle towed for service. (See “Towing come on when you start Your Vehicle”in the Index.) your engineand may stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. I A CAUTION: If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the Your brake system may not be working properly light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as if the brake system warning light is on. Driving possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine with the brake system warning light on can lead again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or to an accident.If the lightis still on after you’ve comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t the vehicle towed for service. on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System will also come onwhen you set your parking brake. Warning Light” earlier in this section. The lightwill stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive off with the parking The anti-lock brake system warning light should come brake set, a chime will also come onuntil you release on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the the parking brake. If the light and chime stayon after light doesn’t come on then,have it fixed so it will be your parking brake is fully released, it means you have ready to warn you if there is a problem. a brake problem.
2-62 Traction Control System Warning will turn off and the warning light will come on. If Light (Option) your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come This warning lightshould on until your brakes cool down. come on briefly as you start 0 If the traction control system is affected by an TRACTION the engine. If the warning engine-related problem, the system will turn off and light doesn’t come on then, the warning light will come on. OFF have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s If the traction control system warning light comeson a problem. and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. If it stays on, or comeson when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light your vehicle may need service. When thiswarning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your This light will tell you driving accordingly. that your engine coolant has overheated or your The traction control system warning lightmay come on - radiator cooling arefans for the following reasons: If you turn the system off by pressing the button TEMP I not working* located to the left of the steering column,the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning If you have been operating your vehicleunder normal light should go off. (See “Traction Control System” driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop in the Index for more information.) your vehicle and turn the engine off as soon as possible.
0 If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically In the section “Problems on the Road,” this manual related to traction control, the traction control system explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating”in the Index. 2-63 Engine Coolant TemperatureGage Malfunction IndicatorLamp (If Equipped) (Check Engine Light) If your vehicle is equipped Your vehicle is equipped with the gage cluster, you with a computer which have a gage that shows the monitors operation of the engine coolant temperature. fuel, ignition and emission If the gage pointer moves CHECK control systems. into thered area, your engine is too hot!
This system iscalled OBD I1 (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are atacceptable levels for the That readingmeans the samething as thewarning light. life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner It means that your engine coolanthas overheated. If you environment. The CHECK ENGINElight comes on to have been operating yourvehicle under normal driving indicate that there is a problem and service is required. conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system vehicle and turn off the engine as soonas possible. before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also The enginecoolant temperature gage indicates the designed to assist your service technician in correctly coolant temperature in degreesFahrenheit. The diagnosing anymalfunction. Canadian instrument panels indicatethe coolant temperature in degrees Celsius. In the section “Problems on theRoad,” this manual explains what to do. See“Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-64 If the Light Is Flashing I NOTICE: The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light Reducing vehicle speed. on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as Avoiding hard accelerations. good and your engine may not run as smoothly. Avoiding steep uphill grades. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be 0 If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of covered by your warranty. cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light stops flashing and remainson steady, see “If This light should come on, as a checkto show you it is the Light Is On Steady” following. working, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light doesn’t come on, haveit repaired. If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, This light will also come on during a malfunction in one stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. of two ways: Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds andrestart the engine. If the light remainson steady, see “If the Light 0 Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been Is On Steady” following.If the light is still flashing, detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your may damage the emission control system on your dealer or qualified service center forservice. vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
0 Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosisand service may be required. If the Light Is On Steady If you experience one or moreof these conditions, You may be able toi?iifli%t the emission system change the fuelbrand you use. It will require at least one malfunction by considering the following: full tankof the proper fuel toturn the lightoff. Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, have your dealer or qualified service center checkthe If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipmentand the cap. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel diagnostic tools to fixany mechanical or electrical cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or problems that may have developed. missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly Oil Pressure LightIGage installed shouldturn the light off. If your vehicle has the Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water? standard instrument If so, your electrical systemmay be wet. The condition panel cluster, this light will usually be corrected when the electrical system 73 will come on if there is dries out.A few driving trips shouldturn the light off. OIL a problemwith your engine oil pressure. Have you recently changed brandsof fuel? If so, be sure to fuel your vehiclewith quality fuel (see “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel qualitywill cause your Standard Cluster engine not torun as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle intogear, misfiring, hesitationon ”acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detectedby the systemand cause the light to turn on. If your vehiclehas the But, when this light comes on and stays on, it means oil optional gage cluster, isn’t going through your engine properly. You could be you can read your oil low on oil, or you might have some otheroil problem. pressure directly from See your dealer for service. the gage on your instrument panel. A small light to the left of A CAUTION: the gage will come on if I there is a problem with Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If the engine oil pressure. you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Gage Cluster Check your oil as soon as possible and have The oil light could come on briefly when you turn your your vehicle serviced. key to RUN. It goes off once you turn it to START. That’s just a checkto be sure the light works.If it doesn’t, be sureto have it fixedso it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong. I NOTICE: Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.
2-67 Check Oil Level Light(If Equipped) Change Oil Soon Light(If Equipped) The CHECK OIL LEVEL This light is activated by the light turns on for three Engine Oil Life Monitor CHECK seconds as a bulb check CHANGE System. The EngineOil each time the ignition key is Life Monitor determines the OIL LEVEL turned to RUN. If the light OIL SOON condition of the engine oil doesn’t turn on, have your and lets you know when the vehicle serviced. oil should be changed. See “Engine Oil”in the Index. If the engine oil is more than one quart (0.95 L) low and the engine has been shut off for at least eight minutes, The Engine Oil Life Monitor receives information about the CHECK OIL LEVELlight will turn on for about engine speed, coolant temperature and vehicle speed to one minute and will then remain off until the next time determine how much the oil has degraded. you start the vehicle. When to change your oil depends on your driving habits If the CHECK OIL LEVEL lightturns on, the engine oil and conditions. The CHANGE OIL SOONlight may should be checked at the dipstickthen brought up to the turn on as early as 2,000 miles (3 2 1 8 km)or less for proper level if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. harsh circumstances. The CHANGE OIL SOON light is lit for three seconds as a bulb check each time the ignition key is turned to RUN. It will stay on for 60 seconds once 90 percent of the oil life has been used and each time the engine is started after that. If the CHANGE OIL SOON light is on continuously, there is a problem with the Oil Life Monitor System and service is required.
2-68 After changing the engine oil, the system should be Fuel Gage reset. This will cause the CHANGEOIL SOON light to be lit for a bulb checkperiod of three seconds. Referto “Engine Oil” inthe Index to determine what type of oil to use. Q\\‘ \ E
Standard Cluster Gage Cluster
Your fuel gage shows abouthow much fuel is in your tank. It works only when the engine is on. When the indicator nears EMPTY (E), you still have a little fuel The reset button is in the glovebox. With the ignition key in RUN, push the reset button,hold it in for at least left. You need to get more fuel right away. five seconds but not more than 60 seconds. After five seconds, the CHANGE OIL SOON lightwill flash four times and then go off. This indicates that the Oil Life Monitor System has been reset.
2-69 Here are somethings that some owners askabout. None Low Fuel Light (If Equipped) of these show a problem with your fuel gage: If your vehicle has the 0 At the servicestation, the gas pump shutsoff before gage cluster, a light near the the gage reads FULL (F). fuel gage will turn on when 0 It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the you are low on fuel. You gage indicated. For example,the gage may have should get more fuel as indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a soon as you can. little more or lessthan half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. 0 The gagemoves a little when you turn a corner, speed up, or make a hard stop. 0 The gagedoesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you turn off the ignition.
2-70 @II NOTES fi NOTES
2-72 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offeredwith your vehicle. Be sure toread about the particular systems suppliedwith your vehicle.
3-2 Comfort Controls 3- 17 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and 3-6 Air Conditioning Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-7 Heating 3-21 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and 3-8 Ventilation System Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-9 Defogging and Defrosting 3 -25 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and 3-10 Rear Window Defogger Compact Disc Player with AutomaticTone 3-11 Passenger Control (If Equipped) Control (If Equipped) 3- 11 Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Control 3-30 Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped) 3-32 Audio Steering Wheel Controls(If Equipped) 3-11 Audio Systems 3-33 Understanding Radio Reception 3- 12 Setting the Clock 3-34 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3- 12 AM-FM Stereo 3-35 Care of Your Compact Discs 3- 14 AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player 3-35 Care of Your Compact Disc Player (If Equipped) 3-36 Heated Backlite Antenna
3-1 Comfort Controls Fan Button This section describes how to operateyour climate The FAN control is used to select the speed of the control system. Your climate control system uses blower fan and the force of air you want. There are four ozone-friendly R- 134arefrigerant. speeds to choose from. Moving the lever between LOW and HIGH will decrease or increasethe fan speed. The With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling fan will be off when the system is off. and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in Temperature Lever this section. This lever adjusts the temperature of the air coming Electronic Touch Climate Control through the system. Movethe TEMPERATURE lever to change the temperature of the air coming through your outlets. Move the lever between COOL and WARM to lower or raise the temperature. Mode Controls The buttons on your system allow you to choose settings to deliver air through the lower, middle or windshield outlets. RECIRC: Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This is helpful when you are trying to cool the interior of the vehicle quickly, or limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. :f your vehicle has this climate control system, the To turn off RECIRC, press the button again. If you 'allowing information tells you how it works. select FRONT defrost or BLEND while RECIRC is selected, the system will automatically turn off RECIRC to prevent fogging. VENT: This setting directs outside airthrough the NORM: This setting cools the outside air enteringyour middle instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning vehicle and directs itthrough the middle instrument compressor is notworking when VENT is selected. panel outlets. The air conditioner is onin this mode. HTR: This button directs air outof the heater outlets. BI-LEV: This setting directswarm air to the floor and Most of the air will come from the floor outlets while cooler air to themiddle instrument panel outlets. The air some air will flow through the windshield and side conditioner is on in thismode. window outlets. The airconditioning compressor isnot working when HTR is selected. Dual Automatic Comfortemp BLEND: When BLEND is selected,the aifflow will be Climate Control(If Equipped) split between thewindshield and the floor outlets.The If your vehicle hasthe Dual Automatic Comfortemp air conditioning compressorwill be operating. Climate Control option, the followinginformation tells FRONT This setting directs most of the airflow toward you how it works. the windshield. You will hear a beep each timea button is pushed and a OFF: The ventilation system always allows fresh air light on the button will indicate which function is active. to flow through your vehicle when itis moving. The The lights are on all buttons except TEMP, FAN and system will try to keep the air at a previously chosen AIR FLOW. The display will show fan speed, comfort temperature. When the systemis off, the blower fan is level setting and airflow direction for a few seconds also off. whenever AUTO is selected, and then it will display the outside temperature. The outside temperature reading is MAX: This setting directsairflow through the middle most accurate when the vehicle ismoving. During stops, instrument panel outlets. The amount of outside air the display shows the previoustemperature for best entering your vehicle is limited withthis setting. The air accuracy and system control. conditioning compressor is on in this mode. Temperature Button To adjust the comfort levelyou want maintained inside the vehicle, push the TEMP button. If you want a warmer comfort level, push the red arrow. If you want a cooler comfortlevel, push the bluearrow. Your comfort setting is shown in the display. Fan Button The speed of the blower fan is controlled automaticallyif you have the system set forAUTO. Pressing the FAN button will display and hold the current blower fan setting. If the display is flashingafter the climate control system If you want the blower fan torun at a lower speed, push is started, there is a problem with the system and you the bottom of the FAN button. The fanspeed will should see your dealer for service. decrease with every push of the button until the lowest Sun and temperature sensors automatically adjust the air speed is reached. If you want to increasethe fan speed, temperature, the airflow direction and the fan speed to push the top of the FAN button. Notice the fan maintain your comfort setting. Thesystem may supply indicators in the display. cooler air to the sideof the vehicle toward the sun. Be careful not to put anything overthe sensors on top of Mode Controls the dash. Press the AIR FLOW button to deliverair through the floor, middle or windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected mode until the AUTO button is pushed. Press the up arrow on the AIR FLOW button to cycle through the available modes.
3-4 Automatic Operation Manual Operation Press the AUTO button when you want the system to You may also manually adjust the air delivery or fan speed. automatically adjust to changesin the temperature inside AIR FLOW: This button is used to change the direction the vehicle, the outside temperature and the sun load on of the airflow. The airflow choices available are the vehicle. When the system is set for automatic FLOOR, FLOOR-MID, MID and operation, air will come fromthe floor, middle or WINDSHIELD-FLOOR. If the system is set for AUTO, windshield outlets depending on the temperature inside pressing the AIR FLOW button will display the current the vehicle, the outside temperatureand sun load. Fan airflow direction and the comfort setting. Press the AIR speed will vary as the system gets to and maintains the FLOW up or down button again to change the direction comfort setting you have selected through the use of the of the airflow. TEMP button. If the AIR FLOW up button is selected while in the To find your comfort setting, startwith the system in FRONT defrost mode, the system will direct the air AUTO mode and the TEMP button adjusted to 75°F toward the windshield and the floor. If the AIR FLOW (24"C), give the vehicle about 20 minutes to stabilize, down button is selected while in the FRONT defrost and adjust your comfort setting if necessary, by using mode, the system will direct the air toward the floor, and the TEMP button. The display will show the comfort the FRONT defrost mode will cancel. Notice the arrows setting for a few seconds and then it will display the in the display. outside temperature.If you want to see your current automatic fan speed, airflow direction and comfort OFF: If the passenger comfort control is turned on, it setting, press the AUTO button. can be turned off by pressing the OFF button once. Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off the In cold weather, the system will delay turning on the main system. Turning off the main system causes the fan fan, to avoid blowing cold air. The length of the delay to turn off and the airflow to be directed toward the depends on the engine coolant temperatureand the floor. The system will still try to keep the interior of the outside temperature. Pushingthe FAN, AIR FLOW or vehicle at the previous chosen comfort setting. The FRONT buttons will override this delay, turn off the outside temperature will show on the display when the AUTO setting and change the fan speed. system is OFF. The ventilation system always allows fresh air to flow If FRONT is selected while in the AUTO mode, through your vehicle when the vehicle is moving even the fan speed and the air temperature from the front with the system in the OFF mode. defroster will vary. If a manual fan speed setting is selected, the fan speed will remain at that selection until VENT The VENTbutton allows outside air to flow through your vehicle without the air conditioning another fan speed selection is made or the AUTO mode compressor working. Selecting VENT and the AUTO is selected. To turn off FRONT, press the AUTO or button at the same time allows the system to control AIR FLOW button. automatically without the use of the airconditioning FRONT defrost will work better if any ice or snow is compressor orthe use of the RECIRC mode. To turn off cleared from the hood and the air inlet area between the the VENT selection, push the VENT button again. base of the windshield and the hood. RECIRC: When RECJRC is selected, the system will Air Conditioning limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This is helpful when you are trying to cool the interiorof the On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot vehicle quickly or limit the amountof outside air entering inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your your vehicle. RECIRC and AUTO may be selected at the vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed same time. The system will remain in RECIRC until the for the air conditioner to work its best. ignition is turned off, then the system will return back to If you have the electronic touch system, for quick the previously selected mode. Deselecting the RECIRC cool-down on very hot days, use MAX with the button will also turn off the RECIRC function. RECIRC temperature and fan speed adjusted to COOL and can be selected in all manual airflow modes except HIGH. If this setting is used for long periods of time, the FRONT defrost and VENT. air in your vehicle may become too cold and dry. FRONT This selection is used to defrost the windshield For normal cooling on hot days, use NORM and adjust by directing the airflow toward the windshield. the temperature and fan speed for your comfort. If RECIRC is selected while in the NORM air conditioning mode, the system works like MAX and recirculates the air. 3-6 On sunny days, when the air is moderately warm or Heating cool, use BI-LEV to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the middle instrument panel outlets.On If your vehicle has the electronic touch system, on days like these, the sunmay adequately warm your cold days, useHTR with the TEMPERATURE lever upper body, but your lower bodymay not be warm toward WARM. enough. To warm or cool the air delivered, adjust the If your vehicle has the Dual Automatic Comfortemp TEMPERATURE lever. system, and on cold days,if the AUTO mode is selected, The amount of fresh air entering the vehicle is limited the system will automatically direct the airtoward the when RECIRC is selected. This is helpfulwhen you are floor and the temperature door willbe positioned at the trying to cool the air in your vehicle or limit the air full hot position.You can choose the extreme comfort entering the vehicle. setting of 90°F (32°C) but the systemwill not warm up any faster by selecting the extreme comfort setting.If If your vehicle has the Dual Automatic Comfortemp the outside temperature is cold, the fan willbe delayed system and it is set for AUTO,on very hot days, the to avoid blowing coldair. Pushing the FAN, AIR FLOW system will automatically enter the RECIRC modeand or FRONT buttonswill override thisdelay, turn off the the temperature doorwill be positioned at the full cold AUTO mode and changethe fan speed. position for maximum cooling.If the system is notin the AUTO mode, RECIRC should be selected to provide With each system, outsideair will be brought in and sent maximum cooling. You can choose the extreme comfort through the floor outlets. The heaterworks best if you setting of 60°F (16"C), but the system will not cool any keep your windows closed while usingit. faster by choosing the extreme comfort setting. When the air conditioneris on, you may sometimes notice slight changesin your vehicle's engine speed and power. This is normal because the systemis designed to cycle the compressoron and off to keep the desired temperature.
3-7 Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT (on the electronic touch system or manual operation on the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system) to direct outside air through your vehicle. Air will flow through the middle instrument panel outlets. Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it’s moving. When the vehicle is not moving, you can get outside airto flow through by selecting any air choice (except the rear window defogger) and any fan speed. Adjust the direction of airflow by moving the If you have the rear passenger comfortemp option, louvered vents. you can adjust the direction of the airflow to the rear seating area.
3-8 Ventilation Tips Defogging and Defrosting 0 Keep the hood and front air inlet freeof ice, snow or If you have the electronic touch system, adjust the any other obstruction such as leaves. The heater and TEMPERATURE lever toward WARM and the FAN defroster will work better, reducing the chance of lever toward HIGH. fogging your windows. If you have the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system, 0 Keep the air path under the front seats clearof use the FRONT button to defog or defrost the objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout windshield. By choosing thisbutton, the airflow will be your vehicle. directed at the windshield. Adjust your comfort level by 0 When the engine idles for a longtime, the exterior pressing the TEMP up or down arrow. The fanspeed temperature sensor may causethe system to blow air will be controlled by the system. You can change the fan that is too cool. Oncethe vehicle is moving again, speed by pressing the topof the FAN button to increase the system will try to maintain the set temperature speed, and the bottom of the button to decrease speed. inside your vehicle. To reduce the chance of fogging your windows in cold 0 When you start your vehicle and the EXT display weather, using the electronic touch system, selectHTR flashes (Dual Automatic Comfortemp system only) to supply air through the floor outlets. The.n move the for some time, the system may need repair. See FAN lever to HIGH for a fewmoments before driving your dealer. away. This will blow moist air from the intake outlets toward the floor, not the windshield. If you have the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system, the AUTO setting will do this for you.Manual operation of the automatic comfortemp system in the FLOOR mode will also supply air through the floor outlets.
3-9 Rear Window Defogger Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window. The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass. Pressthis button to NOTICE: start warming your window. Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear defogger grid. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself, or pressing the button during the heating cyclewill turn it off. If you need additional warming time, push the button again. The systemwill then operate for fiveminutes before going off by itself.
3-10 Passenger Control (If Equipped) Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Control (If Equipped) If you have the Dual Automatic Comfortemp If your vehicle has this system, the front seat feature, you can control the passenger can control the temperature function by air temperaturein their using the button on your seating area. steering wheel. Press the TEMP up arrow to increase the temperature and the TEMP down arrow to decrease the temperature.
The temperature canbe set up to 5 OF(- 15 O C) cooleror warmer than the primary setting. To activate the passenger control, simply press the COOL or WARM buttons located on the passenger’sdoor. Audio Systems The indicator lights above the control will show the Your Delco Electronics audio systemhas been designed difference from the main temperature setting. to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. If the passenger control has been turned on, it can be You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint turned off by pressing the OFF button once. Pressingthe yourself with it first.Find out what your Delco OFF button a second timewill turn off the main system. Electronics system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
3-11 Setting theClock Playing theRadio Press and hold HRS until the correct hour appears. Press VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and and hold MIN until the correct minute appears. controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to You may set the clock with the ignition off if you decrease volume. press RECALL first and follow the same procedure described above. RECALL: Press the upper knob briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock. To change AM-FM Stereo what is normally shown on the display (station or time), press the knob until you see the display you want, then hold the knob until the display flashes. If you press the knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the AM-FM button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-12 SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows fortwo seconds, Setting theTone and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the listen to stations for a few seconds. The radiowill go to knob to increase or decrease bass. a station, stop for a few seconds,then go on to the next station. Press oneof the SEEK arrows again to stop TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the scanning. The sound will mute while scanning. knob to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to Push these knobs back into their stored positions when 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: you’re not using them. 1. Turn the radio on. Adjusting the Speakers 2. Press the AM-FM button to select the band. BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move 3. Tune in the desired station. the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move Whenever you press that numbered button, the the sound to the front or rear speakers. Themiddle station you set will return. position balances the sound between the speakers. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds.The radio will go to the first preset station, stop for a few seconds,then go on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop scanning. The radiowill not stop at a preset station if the station is weak.
3-13 AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player RECALL: Press the upper knob briefly to recall the (If Equipped) station being played or to display the clock. To change what is normally shown on the display (station or time), press the knob until you see the display you want, then hold the knob until the display flashes. If you press the knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM, FMl and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to chooseradio stations. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows fortwo seconds, and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to Playing the Radio listen to stations for a few seconds. The radiowill go to VOLUME: This knobturns the system on and off and a station, stop for a fewseconds, then go on to the next controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to scanning. The sound will mute while scanning. decrease volume.
3-14 PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let Setting theTone you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the 18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2).Just: knob to increaseor decrease bass. 1. Turn the radio on. TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. knob to increase or decrease treble.If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The Push these knobs back into their stored positions when sound will mute. When it returns, release thebutton. you’re notusing them. Whenever you press that numbered button, the Adjusting the Speakers station you set will return. BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle P SCAN: Press this button to listen to eachof your position balances the soundbetween the speakers. preset stations fora few seconds. The radiowill go to FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the first preset station, stop fora few seconds, then go the sound tothe front or rear speakers. The middle on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop position balances the sound between the speakers. scanning. The radiowill not stop at a preset if the station is weak. Playing a Cassette Tape 0 Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape. The longer side with the tape visible should face to the If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or displays an error number, write it down and provide it to hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. your dealer when reporting the problem. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over. PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE, selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three BAL, BASS and TREB controls just asyou do for the seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to radio. Other controls may have different functions when work. The sound will mute while seeking. a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next show which side of the tape is playing. selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to off, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that the work. The sound will mute while seeking. cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc The SEEK left and right arrows will also find the players will work in your cassette tape player. previous and next selections on the tape. Your tape bias is set automatically. 44 (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will won’t play because of an error. play while the tape reverses. E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the (4): Press this button to advance quickly to another tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the ..part of the tape. Press the button again to return to open end down andtry to turn the right hub to the left playing speed. The radio will play while the tape with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the advances. hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your playeris working properly. 3-16 SIDE (5): Press this button to change the sideof the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player tape that is playing. and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped) 00 (6): Press this button to reduce background noise. The display will show either OFF or ON for a few seconds when you press the button. Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. EJECT Press this button to remove the tape.The radio will play. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needsto be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes andplayer. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. Afteryou clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to Playing the Radio reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display--- to show the indicator was reset. VOLUME: Press this knob toturn the system on and off. To increase volume,turn the knob to the right.Turn it to the left to decrease the volume.
3-17 RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let being played or todisplay the clock.To change what is you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to normally shown on the display (station or time), press 18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2). Just: this button until you see the display you want, then hold 1. Turn the radio on. the button until the display flashes. If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. few seconds. 3. Tune in the desired station. Findin&a Station 4. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer. AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The and FM2. The display shows your selection. sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to choose radio stations. station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. mute while seeking. P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for twoseconds preset stations for a few seconds. Theradio will go to and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to the first preset station, stop for afew seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop listen to stations for a few seconds.The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds,then go on to the next scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the station. Press one of the SEEK buttons again to stop radio will not stop at the preset station. scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
3-18 AUTO SET Press this button and the systemwill seek Adjusting the Speakers and set the12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM BAL: Press hsknob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob stations on your preset buttons (depending on which to move the soundto the left or right speakers.The middle band (AM or FM)you are listening to). AUTOSET will position balances the sound between the speakers. flash while seeking andwill remain on until this function is complete.To return to the stations you FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the manually set, press AUTO SET again. knob to move the sound to the frontor rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Setting the Tone Push these knobs back into their stored positions when BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the you’re not using them. knob to increase or decrease bass. Playing a CassetteTape TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the knob to increase or decrease treble.If a station isweak The longer sidewith the tape visible should face to the or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can be inserted andwill begin playing.If you hear nothing or Push these knobs back into their stored positionswhen hear a garbled sound, the tapemay not be in squarely. you’re not using them. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over. TONE: This feature allowsyou to choose preset bass While the tapeis playing, use the VOLUME,FADE, and treble equalization settings designed for classical, BAL, BASS and TREB controls justas you do for the pop, rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations. radio. Other controlsmay have different functionswhen CLASS will appear on the display whenyou first press a tape is inserted.The display will showan arrow to TONE. Each timeyou press it, another setting will show which sideof the tape is playing. appear on the display. Pressit again after C& W appears and MANUALwill appear. Tone control will If you want to insert a tapewhen the ignition or radio is return to theBASS and TREB knobs. Also,if you use off, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that the the BASS and TREB knobs, control will returnto them cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc and MANUAL will appear. players will work in your cassette tapeplayer. 3-19 Your tape bias is set automatically. NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three won’t play because of an error. seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to work. The sound will mute while seeking. ElO: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the The SEEK up and down arrows will also find the open end down and try to turn the right hub to the previous and next selections on the tape. left with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If 44 (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be Press it again to return to playing speed. The radiowill damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a play while the tape reverses. new tape to make sureyour player is working ,, (4): Press this button to advance quickly to another properly. part of the tape. Press the button again to return to Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape. playing speed. The radio will play while the tape advances. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the displays an error number, write it down and provide it to tape that is playing. your dealerwhen reporting the problem. 00 (6): Press this button to reduce background noise. PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous The double-D symbol will appear on the display. selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license seconds of silence between each selection for PREVto from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby work. The sound will mute while seeking. and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
3-20 AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player is in the player. and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped) SOURCE: Press this button to change tothe tape function when the radio is on.TAPE PLAY with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape isactive. EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. CLN: If this message appearson the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean itas soon aspossible to prevent damage to the tapesand player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player’’ in the Index.After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Playing the Radio VOLUME: Press this knob toturn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to decrease the volume.
3-21 RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. being played or to display the clock. To change what is 3. Tune in the desired station. normally shown on the display (station or time), press the button until you see the display you want, then hold 4. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer. the button until the display flashes. If you press the 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. few seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the Finding a Station station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button. AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. and FM2. The display showsyour selection. P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your TUNE: Press the upor down arrowto choose radio stations. preset stations for a few seconds. Theradio will go to SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next the first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then go higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop mute while seeking. scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the SCAN: Press oneof the SEEK mows for two seconds radio will not stop at the preset station. and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to AUTO SET Press this button and the system will seek listen to stations for a few seconds. The radiowill go to and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM a station, stop fora few seconds, then go on to the next stations on your preset buttons (depending on which station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop band (AM or FM) you are listening to). AUTO SET will scanning. The soundwill mute while scanning. flash while seeking and will remain on until this PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let function is complete. To return to the stations you you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to manually set, press AUTO SET again. 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 3-22 Setting the Tone FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this knob to move the soundto the front orrear BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass. speakers. The middleposition balances the sound between the speakers. TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the Push these knobsback into their stored positions when knob to increase or decreasetreble. If a station is weak you’re not using them. or noisy, you may want to decreasethe treble. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when Playing a Compact Disc you’re not using them. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label sideup. The TONE: This feature allows you to choosepreset bass player will pull it in. The discshould begin playing. and treble equalization settings designed for classical, If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio pop, rock, jazz, talkand country/western stations. is off, first press EJECT or RECALL. CLASS will appear on the display when you first press TONE. Each time you press it, another settingwill If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot, appear on the display. Press it again after C & W the disc may not play and an error code may appear on appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will the display. When things get back to normal, the disc return to the BASSand TREB knobs. Also,if you use should play. If the disc comes out,it could be that: the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them E20: The disc is upside down. and MANUAL will appear. 0 E20: It is dirty, scratched or wet.
Adjusting the Speakers 0 E20: There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn this knob about an hour and try again.) to move the sound to the leftor right speakers. The middle If any error occursrepeatedly or if an error can’t be position balances the sound between the speakers. corrected, please contactyour dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. 3-23 PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of the RECALL: Press this button to see which track is current track if more than eight seconds have played. If playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how you hold the button or press it more than once, the long it has been playing. To change what is normally player will continue moving back through the disc. The shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the sound will mute while seeking. button until you see the display you want, then hold the button until the display flashes. NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc player will continue moving forwardthrough the disc. is in the player. The sound will mute while seelung. SOURCE: Press this button to change to the disc The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the function when the radio is on. When a discis inserted, previous and next selections on the disc. the disc will play until you press AM-FM. Then the disc 44 (3): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse will stop playing and the radio will play. Press SOURCE within a track. You will hear sound. again to play a disc again. CD PLAY will show on the display. (4): Press and hold this button to quickly advance EJECT Press this button to remove the disc. The radio within a track. You will hear sound. will play. RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks in If you turn off the ignition or .radio with a disc in the random, rather than sequential, order. Press RAND player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the again to turn off random play. ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last-selected audio source.
3-24 AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone being played or to display the clock. To change what is normally shown on the display (station or time), press Control (If Equipped) the RECALL button until you see the display you want, then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes. If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clack will show for a few seconds. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Press the upor down arrowto choose radio stations. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN: Press one of the SEEKarrows for two seconds and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations fora few seconds. The radiowill go to Playing the Radio a station, stop fora few seconds, then go on to the next VOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on and station. Press oneof the SEEK arrows again to stop off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn scanning. The soundwill mute while scanning. it to the leftto decrease volume. \ 1 PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let AUTO SET: Press this buttonand the system will seek you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to and set the 12 strongest FM or the6 strongest AM . 18 stations (sixAM, six FM1 and, sixEM2). Just: stations on your preset buttons. AUTOSET will flash while seeking and will remain on untilthis function is 1. Turn the radio on. complete. To return to the stations you manuallyset, 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. press AUTO SET again. 3. Tune in the desired station. Setting the Tone 4. Press TONE to select the settingyou prefer. BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The knob to increase or decrease bass. sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button. TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends'. Turnthe' Whenever you press that numbered button, the knob to increase or decrease treble.If a stationis weak station you set will return and the tone you selected or noisy, you may want to decrease the .treble. % will be automatically selected for that button. Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. you're not using them. P SCAN: Press this button to listento.each of your TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass preset stations for a few seconds. The radiowill go to and treble equalization settings designed for classical, the first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then gopop, rock,jazz, talk and country/western stations. on to the next preset statioh. PressP SCAN again to stop CLASS will appear on the display when you first press scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the TONE. Each time you pressit, another setting-will radio will not stop at the preset station. appear on the display. Pressit again after C & W appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also, if youuse the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them and MANUAL will appear.
3-26 Adjusting the Speakers Your tape bias is set automatically. BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape knob to move the soundto the left orright speakers. The won’t play because of an error. middle position balances the sound between the 0 E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the speakers. tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the open end down and try to turn the right hub to theleft knob to move the sound tothe front orrear speakers. with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat.If the The middle position balances the sound between hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and the speakers. should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to Push these knobs back intotheir stored positions when make sure your playeris working properly. you’re not using them. Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape. Playing a Cassette Tape If any error occursrepeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, pleasecontact your dealer. If your radio The longer sidewith the tape visible should face to the displays an error number, write it down and provide it to right. If the ignition and the radio areon, the tape can be your dealer when reporting the problem. inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous Press EJECT to remove the tapeand start over. selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME,FADE, work. The sound will mute while seeking. BAL, BASS and TREB controlsjust asyou do for the radio. Other controls may have different functionswhen NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three show which side of the tape is playing. seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to work. The sound will mute while seeking. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is off, first press EJECT or RECALL. The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the EJECR The systemhas two EJECTbuttons. Press the previous and next selections on the tape. button near the CD slot to remove a disc. Press the button near the tape slot to removea tape and the radio 44 (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. will play. Press it again to return to playing speed. The radiowill play while the tape reverses. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play (4): Press this button to advance quicklyto another tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to part.. of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing prevent damage tothe tapes and player. See “Care of speed. The radio will play while the tape advances. Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the the player, press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to tape that is playing. reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to RAND (6): Press this button to reduce background show the indicator was reset. noise. The double-D symbol will appear in the display. Your cassette tape player automatically reduces Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR. from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby You may turn Dolby off by pressing the number and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby six preset. Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Playing a Compact Disc SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape or Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The disc function when the radio is on. If both a tape and a player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. disc are installed, the system will first go to tape play; TAPE SIDE and an arrow will appear on the display. If If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio SOURCE is pressed again, the system will go to disc is off, first press EJECT or RECALL. play; CD PLAY will appear on the display.
3-28 If you’re driving on avery rough road or if it’s very hot, 44 (3): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse the disc may not play and an error code may appear on within a track. You will hear sound. the display. When things get back to normal, the disc (4): Press and hold this button to quickly advance should play. If the disc comes out, it couldbe that: ,, within a track. You will hear sound. 0 E20: The disc is upside down. RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks in 0 E20: It is dirty, scratched or wet. random, rather than sequential, order. Press RAND again to turn off random play. 0 E20: There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an hourand try again.) RECALL: Press this button to see which track is If any error occursrepeatedly or if an error can’t be playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how corrected, pleasecontact your dealer. If your radio long it has been playing. To change what is normally displays an error number, write it down and provide it to shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the your dealer when reporting the problem. RECALL button until you see the display you want, then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes. PREV (1): Press this button to go to the startof the current track, if more than eight seconds have played.If AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc you hold the button or press it morethan once, the is in the player. player will continue moving back through the disc. The SOURCE: Press this button to change to the disc sound will mute while seeking. function when the radio is on. When a disc is inserted, NEXT (2): Press this button to go to thenext track. If the disc will play until you press AM-FM. Then the disc you hold the button orpress it more than once,the will stop playing and the radio will play. Press SOURCE player will continue moving forwardthrough the disc. again to play a disc again. CD PLAY will show on the The sound will mute while seeking. display. The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the EJECT Press this button to remove the disc. The radio previous and next selections on the disc. will play.
3-29 If you turn off the ignition or radiowith a disc in the Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the The instructions which follow explain how to enter your ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is stopped, if it was the last-selected audio source. recommended that you read through all nine steps Also, as a protection feature, if a CD is ejected and left before starting the procedure. in the player, it will be pulled back in the player with the NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse ignition on or off. between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to Theft-Deterrent Feature time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4. THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your 1. Write down any three or four-digit number from radio. It works by using a secret code todisable all radio 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from functions whenever battery power is removed. the vehicle. If THEFTLOCK is active, the THEFTLOCK indicator 2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. will flash when the ignition is off. 3. Turn the radio off. The THEFTLOCK feature forthe radio may be used or 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the radio is not protected by the feature.If THEFTLOCK is secret code number which you have written down. activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. 5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display. When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display 6. LOC to indicatea locked condition anytime battery Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree power is removed. If your battery loses power for any with your code. reason, you must unlock the radiowith the secret code 7. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree before it will operate. with your code. 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the 4. Press HRS to make the first one or two digitsagree code matches the secret code you have written down. with your code. The display will show REP to letyou know that you 5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your code matches the secret code you have written down. secret code. The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is 9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show now operable and secure. SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour Power Loss with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three more chances Enter your secret codeas follows; pause no morethan (eight tries per chance) to enter the correct code before 15 seconds between steps: INOP appears. 1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer. 2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display. 3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
3-31 Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Audio Steering Wheel Controls Enter your secret code as follows; pauseno more than (If Equipped) 15 seconds between steps: If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel. 2. Turn the radio off. Some steeringwheel controls may operate climate controls. See “Steering Wheel Controls for Climate 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows onthe display. Control” earlier in this section. 4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display. SEEK: Press this button to 5. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree go to the next higher or with your code. lower radio station,Press and hold this button again 6. Press HRS to makethe first one or two digits agree for two seconds and SCAN with your code. will appear. Press it again to 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the stop scanning. code matches the secret codeyou have written down. The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is no longer secured. If the code entered is incorrect, SECwill appear onthe display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered. SCAN: Press this button to scan the stations preset on When battery power is removed and later applied to a your radio pushbuttons. This featureworks like your secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will radio’s P SCAN button and allows you to listen to each appear on the display. of your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will To unlock a secured radio see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent go to the first preset station, stop fora few seconds, then Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section. go on to the next preset station. Press SCAN again to 3-32 stop scanning.If a preset station has weak reception, the Understanding Radio Reception radio will not stop at the preset station. AM AM-FM: Press this button to chooseAM, FM1 or FM2. The range for mostAM stations is greater than forFM, VOL: Press the up or down especially at night. The longer range, however, can arrow to increase or cause stations to interferewith each other.AM can pick decrease volume. up noise from things like storms and power lines.Try reducing the treble to reduce this noiseif you ever get it. FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound,but FM signals will reach only about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interferewith FM signals, causing the sound to come and go. Tips AboutYour Audio System SRCE: If you have radio-only controls,you will have Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable this control. PressSRCE to play a cassette tapeor until it istoo late.Your hearing can adapt to higher compact disc when the radio is playing.If both a tape volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal canbe loud and disc are installed, the system will first go to tape and harmfulto your hearing.Take precautions by play. Press SRCE again to go to discplay. adjusting the volume control onyour radio to a safe sound level beforeyour hearing adapts toit. MUTE: If you have radio-only controls,you will have this control. Press MUTEto silence the system. Press it again to turn on the sound.
3-33 To help avoid hearing loss or damage: Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
I . Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. A tape player thatis not cleaned regularly can cause Increase volume slowly until you hear cornfortably reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged and clearly. mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate NOTICE: properly or may cause failureof the tape player. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every Before you add anysound equipment to your 50 hours of use. Your radio may displayCLN to indicate vehicle -- like a tapeplayer, CB radio, mobile that you have used your tape player 50 for hours without telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can resetting the tape clean timer.If this message appears on ‘addwhat you want. If you can, it’s very the display, your cassette tape player needs to be important to do it propefly. Added sound cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should cleanit as equipment ‘mayinterfere with the operationof soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reductionin sound quality, a your vehicle’s engine, DelcoElectronics -radio or try known good cassette to seeif it is the tape or the tape other systems, and even damage them. Your player at fault.If this other cassette has no improvement vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the in souild quality, clean the tape player. operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use.of a scrubbing action, So, before adding sound equipment, check with non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which-scrub your dealer andbe sure to check Federal rules the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. covering mobileradio andtelephone units. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789). When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning Care of Your Compact Discs cassette, it is normal forthe cassette to eject because your unit is equippedwith a cut tape detection feature Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. If or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight the cleaning cassette ejects, insert the cassetteat least and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a three times to ensurethorough cleaning. clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the centerto the edge. You may also choose a non-scrubbingaction, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt toclean Be sure never to touch the signal surfacewhen handling the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleanermay edge of the hole and the outer edge. not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbingtype cleaner. Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette is not recommended. The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. five seconds toreset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time.Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.
3-35 Heated Backlite Antenna If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you hear static on your radio station, it could mean that a Your AM-FM antenna is integrated with your rear defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the window defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure grid linemust be repaired. that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the lines onthe glass are not If you choose toadd a cellular telephone to your damaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the interfere with radio reception.Do not apply glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for aftemarket glass tinting. The metallic film in some the AM-FM antenna. tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radioreception.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frostor other material from the inside of the rear window witha razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
3-36 b NOTES
3-37 fi NOTES
3-38 Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kindsof roads and in varying weather conditions.We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.
4- 2 Defensive Driving 4- 17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4- 3 Drunken Driving 4- 20 City Driving 4- 6 Control of a Vehicle 4- 21 Freeway Driving 4- 6 Braking 4- 22 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4- 10 Steering 4- 23 Highway Hypnosis 4- 12 Off-Road Recovery 4- 23 Hill and Mountain Roads 4- 13 Passing 4- 25 Winter Driving 4- 14 Loss of Control 4- 29 Loading Your Vehicle 4- 15 Driving at Night 4- 31 Towing a Trailer
4-1 Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.’’ On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the mostpreventable of accidents. Yet they are common.Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the drivingtask. Anything that distracts from the driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching forsomething on the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult Defensive Driving and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. The best advice anyone can give aboutdriving is: Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull Drive defensively. off the road in a safe place to dothem yourself. Please start with a very important safety device in your These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save Buick: Buckle up. (See“Safety Belts” in the Index.) your life. Drunken Driving The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But Death and injury associated with drinking and drivingis what if people do? Howmuch is “too much” if the a nationaltragedy. It’s the number one contributor to driver plans to drive?It’s a lot lessthan many might the highway death toll, claiming thousandsof victims think. Although it dependson each person and situation, every year. here is some general information on the problem. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)of someone a vehicle: who is drinking dependsupon four things: Judgment The amount of alcohol consumed MuscularCoordination The drinker’s body weight Vision The amount of food that is consumed before and Attentiveness. during drinking Police records showthat almost half of all motor The length of time it has taken the drinker to vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, consume the alcohol. these deaths are the resultof someone who was drinking According to the American Medical Association, a and driving. In recent years, over17,000 annual motor 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce vehicle-related deaths havebeen associated with the use (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will endup with a of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured. BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the Many adults -- by some estimates, nearlyhalf the same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120ml) glasses adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so of wine or threemixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces they never drive after drinking. For persons under2 1, (45 ml) of a liquor likewhiskey, gin or vodka. it’s against the lawin every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. 1 i. c. .. Since alcoholis carried in.body water,this means that a womin generally will reach a higher BAC level thana man of her same body weight when each thehas same number ofdrinks. ,The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit atBAC a of 0.10 percent. In a growing number ofU.S. states, and .throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limitall for commercial driversin the United States is0.04 percent. The BAC will be over0.10 percent after threeto six drinks (in one hour).Of course, as we’ve seen,it depends ion how much alcoholis in-thedrinks, and how quickly the persondrinks them.
But the ability to driveis affected well below a BACof ’’ 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.All the same persondrank three double’ martinis(3 ounces drivers’ are impaired at BAC levels above0.05 percent. or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s Statistics show that the chanceof being in a,collision BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who increases sharply for drivers who have a BACof consumes foodjust before or during drillkingwill have a 0.05 percent-orabove. A driver with BACa level of somewhat lower BAC level. ., 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chanceof having a collision. At a BAC levelof 0.10 percent, the chanceof There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have this driver having a collisionis 12 .times greater; at a a lower relative percentageof body water than men. level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 times greater! The body takes aboutan hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed thatup. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous. A person with even a moderateBAC might not be able Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. judgment can be affected by even a small amount There’s something else about drinking and driving that of alcohol. You can have a serious-- or even many people don’tknow. Medical research shows that fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking. alcohol in aperson’s system can make crash injuries Please don’t drink anddrive or ridewith a driver worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; orif heart. This means that when anyone who has been you’re with a group, designate a driver who will drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that not drink. person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher thanif the person had notbeen drinking.
4-5 Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehiclego where Braking action involvesperception time and you want it to go.They are the brakes, the steeringand reaction time. the accelerator. All three systems have to do theirwork First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. at the placeswhere the tiresmeet the road. That’s perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds or morewith another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight allplay a part. So do alcohol,drugs and frustration. But evenin 314 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That couldbe a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distancesvary greatly with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the conditionof the road (wet,dry, icy); tire tread; the conditionof your brakes; the weightof the vehicle and the amountof brake force applied. Sometimes, aswhen you’re drivingon snow or ice,it’s easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires and roadcan provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in Anti-Lock Brakes spurts -- heavy acceleration followedby heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between advanced electronic braking system that will help hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you prevent a braking skid. do a lotof heavy braking. If you keep pace with the When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You eliminate a lotof unnecessary braking. That means may hear a momentary motor or clickingnoise while better braking and longer brake life. this test is going on, andyou may even notice that your If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal. normally but don’t pump your brakes.If you do, the If there’s a problem with the pedal may get harderto push down.If your engine anti-lock brake system,this stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But warning light will stay on. you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is See “Anti-Lock Brake used up, it may take longerto stopand the brakepedal System Warning Light” in will be harderto push. the Index.
4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could.The computer is programmed to make the mostof available tire and road conditions.
. ...
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s.say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS, You can steeraround the obstacle while braking hard. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one As you brake, your computer keepsreceiving updates on of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. separately work the brakes at each frontwheel and at both rear wheels.
4-8 Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the timeyou need If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction to get your footup to the brake pedal or always decrease control system beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise stopping distance.If you get too close to the vehicle in control will automatically disengage. Whenroad front of you, you won’t have timeto apply your brakes conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave reengage the cruise control. (See “CruiseControl’’ enough room upahead to stop, even though you have in the Index.) anti-lock brakes. This light should come on Using Anti-Lock briefly when you start the engine. If it stays on or Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down TRACTION comes on while you are firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a driving, there’s a problem slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but OFF with your traction this is normal. control system. Traction Control System(If Equipped) See “Traction Control System Warning Light’’ in the Your vehicle may have a traction control system that Index. Whenthis warning light is on, the system will not limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinningor The traction control system automatically comes on beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, system works the front brakesand reduces engine power especially in slipperyroad conditions, you should to limit wheel spin. always leave the system on. Butyou can turn the traction control systemoff if you ever needto. (You You may feel or hear the system working, but this should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck is normal. in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
4-9 To turn the system off, press Steering the TRACTION CONTROL button on the Power Steering instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system isnot functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Magnasteer (If Equipped)
. , ...... ’. . ,8.r:,> i“”’ ”’ Your vehicle may be equipped with GM Magnasteer” , :: . ! ...... a steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease The traction control systemwarning light will come on when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds. and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when Your steering can be adjusted for an easier or more firm you press the button, the warning light will come setting. See your dealer forinformation. on -- but the system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit Steering Tips wheel spin. You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing Driving on Curves the button again. Thetraction control system warning It’s important to takecurves at a reasonable speed. light should go off. A lot of the “driver lost control”accidents mentioned on Braking in Emergencies the news happen on curves.Here’s why: With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering canhelp you more than even thevery best braking.
4-10 Experienced driver or beginner, eachof us is subject to If you need to reduceyour speed as you approach a the same lawsof physics when driving on curves. The curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front traction of the tires against the road surface makesit wheels are straight ahead. possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to the vehicle going in the same direction.If you’ve ever accelerate untilyou are out of the curve, and then tried to steera vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. accelerate gently into the straightaway. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires andthe road surface, the angle at Steering in Emergencies which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re There are times when steering can be more effective than in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control. braking. For example,you come over a hill and find a Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve. Then you truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet cars and stops right in frontof you. You can avoid these the road. Adding the sudden accelerationcan demand too problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But much of those places. You can lose control.Refer to sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the timefor “Traction Control” in the Index. evasive action -- steering around the problem. What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the Your vehicle can performvery well in emergencies like accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it these. First apply your brakes. (See “Brakingin to go, and slow down. Emergencies” earlier in this section.)It isbetter to remove as much speed as you can from a possible Speed limit signs near curveswarn that you should collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are right depending on the space available. based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’llwant to go slower.
4-11 Off-Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou're driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel once you have If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the avoided the object. pavement, recovery should be fairlyeasy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so The fact that such emergency situations are always that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You possible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat can the steering wheel up to one-quarter until the all times and wear safety belts properly. turn turn right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Thenturn your steering wheelto go straight down the roadway.
4-12 Passing 0 Do not get too close to the vehicleyou want to pass while you’re awaitingan opportunity. For one The driver of a vehicle about to pass another ona thing, following too closely reduces your areaof two-lane highway waits forjust the right moment, vision, especiallyif you’re following a larger accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes vehicle. Also,you won’t have adequate spaceif the back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver? vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep backa Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle ona two-lane reasonable distance. highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the 0 When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming start to acceleratebut stay in the right lane and don’t traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in get too close. Time your moveso you will be judgment, ora brief surrender to frustration or anger can increasing speed as the time comesto move into the suddenly put the passing driverface to face with the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision. “running start”that more than makes up for the So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back.And if something happens to causeyou to cancel your pass, “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to you need only slow down and drop back againand crossroads for situations that might affect your passing wait for another opportunity. patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time. If other cars are lined up to passa slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someoneisn’t trying to Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea Remember to glance over your shoulderand check turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken the blind spot. center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never crossa solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.
4-13 0 Check your mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out constantly seek an escape routeor area of less danger. of the right lane topass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle tosee its front inyour Skidding inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal In a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle. and move back into theright lane. (Remember that Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicle you care suited to existing conditions, andby not “overdriving” just passed may seem to be fartheraway from you those conditions. But skidsare always possible. than it really is.) The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s 0 Try not to pass more than one vehicleat a time three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too next vehicle. much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and 0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. be slowing down or starting to turn. A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off 0 If you’re being passed, make iteasy for the the accelerator pedal. following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you If you have the traction control system, remember: It can ease a little to the right. helps avoid only the acceleration skid. Loss of Control If you do not have traction control, orif the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by Let’s review what driving experts say about what easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
4-14 If your vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the Driving at Night accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go.If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Alwaysbe ready for a second skidif it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel or other materialis on the road. For safety, you’ll 7 want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow downon slippery surfaces because stopping distance willbe longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine brakingby shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery untilyour vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface”-- and slow down when you have any doubt. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some driversare likely to be impaired -- by Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems,or by fatigue. avoid only the braking skid.
4-15 Rere are some tips on night driving. down on glare from headlamps,but they also make a lot of things invisible. 0 Drive defensively. You can be temporarily blindedby approaching 0 Don’t drink and drive. headlamps. It can take a second or two,or even several 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the seconds, foryour eyes to readjustto the dark. Whenyou glare from headlamps behind you. are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who 0 Since you can’t see as well,you may need to slow doesn’t lowerthe high beams, or a vehiclewith down and keep more space betweenyou and other misaimed headlamps), slow down a little.Avoid staring vehicles. directly into the approaching headlamps. 0 Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your Keep your windshield and all the glass youron vehicle headlamps can lightup only so much road ahead. clean -- inside and out. Glare at night made is much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the insideof the glass 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes 0 If you’re tired, pulloff the road in a safe place lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, and rest. making the pupilsof your eyes contractrepeatedly. Remember thatyour headlamps lightup far lessof a Night Vision roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as eyes moving;that way, it’s easier to pickout dimly we get olderthese differences increase. A 50-year-old lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be driver may require at least twiceas much light to see the checked regularly for proper aim,so should your eyes same thing at nightas a 20-year-old. be examinedregularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to seein dim light -- and What you do in the daytimecan also affect your night aren’t even awareof it. vision. For example,if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. Butif you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night.They may cut 4-16 Driving in Rain andon Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have muchtread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slowerand be cautious if rain starts to fallwhile you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are ingood shape, a heavy rain can make itharder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edgeof the road and even people walking. r It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
4-17 Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving through a large puddleof water or ...... $ti a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through largewater puddles or even going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-18 Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous.So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happenif the road is wet enough and you’re NOTICE: going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But can it if your engine’s air intake and badly damage your tires do nothave much tread or if the pressure in one or engine. Never drive through water that is slightly more is low. It can happenif a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone lower than the underbodyof your vehicle.If you poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. through them very slowly. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The Some Other Rainy Weather Tips best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)
4-19 Here are ways to increase yoursafety in city driving: Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just asyou would for a cross-country trip. Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is therebecause the corner is busy enough to need it. Whena light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.
4-20 Freeway Driving At the entrance, there isusually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic.Try to determine whereyou expect to blend with the flow.Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothlywith the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit orto the prevailing rateif it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unlessyou want to pass. Before changing lanes, checkyour mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly overyour shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certainyou allow a reasonable following distance. Expectto move Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night. expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. When you want to leavethe freeway, moveto the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, The most important adviceon freeway driving is: Keep under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same the next exit. speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp canbe curved, sometimes quite sharply. left lane on a freewayas a passing lane. 4-21 The exit speed is usually posted. Here are some thingsyou can check before atrip: Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not 0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance all windows clean insideand outside? at higher speeds,you may tend to thinkyou are going 0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? slower thanyou actually are. 0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked Before Leaving on a Long Trip all levels? Make sure you’reready. Try to be well rested.If you 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? must start when you’re not fresh-- such as after a day’s work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part 0 Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoesyou trouble-free trip.Is the tread good enough for can easily drive in. long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflatedto the recommended pressure? Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it serviced and maintained,it’s ready to go.If it needs 0 Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook service, haveit done before starting out.Of course, along your route? Shouldyou delay your trip a short you’ll find experienced and able service experts in time to avoid a major storm system? Buick dealerships all across North America. They’llbe 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? ready and wmng to help if you need it.
4-22 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Callit highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretchof road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, andthe rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’tlet it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road lessin than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware thatit canhappen. Then here are some tips: 0 Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. 0 Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from instruments frequently. driving in flat or rolling terrain. 0 If you get sleepy, pulloff the road intoa rest, service or parking area and takea nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
4-23 If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are sometips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. 0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL(N) or with the levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to and transaxle. These parts can work hard on do the work of slowing down. They could getso mountain roads. all hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then 0 Know how to go down hills. The most important have poor braking or even none going down a hill. thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the You could crash. Always haveyour engine running slowing down. Shift toa lower gear when you go and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. down a steep or long hill. - 0 Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest A CAUTION: gear possible. 0 Stay in your own lane when driving ontwo-lane If you don’t shift down, your brakescould roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let would then have poor braking oreven none going you stay in your own lane. down a hill. You could crash. Shiftdown to let 0 As you go over the topof a hill, be alert. There could be your engine assist your brakeson a steep something in your lane, likea stalled car or an accident. downhill slope. 0 You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of > special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-24 Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer Here are some tips for winter driving: clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag 0 You may want to put winter emergency supplies in of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags your trunk. to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-25 Driving on Snow or Ice What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice..” Very cold snow or ice canbe slick and hard to drive on. But wet Most of the time, those places where yourtires meet the ice can be even more ‘trouble becauseit may offer the road^ probablyhave good traction, ’ ’ . least traction of all. You can get wet ice whenit’s about However, if there is snow orice between your tires and freezing (32°F; OOC) apd freezing rain begins to fall. the road,. you can havea. very ‘slippery situation. You’ll Try to avoid driving on wetice until salt and sand crews have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be can get there. I very careful. Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow-- drive with caution. If you have traction control, keep the system on.It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction, control system, you’ll want to .slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction Control System” inthe Index. If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spinpolish and the surface under thetires even more. . -. f
4-26 . ’. Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability If You’re Caught in a Blizzard when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
0 Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
0 Watch for slippery spots. The road mightbe fine until you hit a spotthat’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surfaceof a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear.If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are onit. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stoppedby heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation.You should probably staywith your vehicle unlessyou know for sure that you arenear help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things todo to summon help and keepyourself and your passengers safe: Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-27 .lie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.
0 Put on extra clothingor wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas mats anything you can wrap around yourself or -- to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill tuck under your clothing to keep warm. you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especiallyany that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from thewind. This will help keep CO out.
You can runthe engine to keep warm,but be careful.
4-28 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves Loading Your Vehicle fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This \ TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the FmOCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP. WT. battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to CTR.FRT. RR. TOTAL LBS. KG restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heaterrun for awhile. MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE Then, shutthe engine off and close the window almost CAPACITYWEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE TIRE SIZE PRESSURESPEED all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again PSI/KPaRTG and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable FRT. from the cold. But do as it little as possible. Preserve the RR. fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get SPA. IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1;28KPa out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL every half hour or so until help comes. INFORMATION L /
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for thetires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you cm carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargoand all nonfactory-installed options.
4-29 MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, or either themaximum front or rear THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI- CABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION break, or itcan change the way your vehicle STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF handles. These could cause you to lose control. MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.
The otherlabel is the Certification label,found on the t rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross I NOTICE: Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes ~~ ~ ~~ the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fueland cargo. Your warranty does not cover parts or Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross components that fail because of overloading. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go asfast out. Don’t carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kilograms) in as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop orturn quickly, your trunk. or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-30 Towing a Trailer
I \ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike A CAUTION: and injurepeople in a sudden stopor turn, orin a crash. If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a 0 Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a trunk, putthem asfar forward asyou can. trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,the Try to spread theweight evenly. brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriouslyinjured. 0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting above the tops of the seats. repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Pull a traileronly if YOU have followed all the 0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. steps in this section. Ask your dealer foradvice and information abouttowing a trailer with 0 When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. your vehicle.
Electronic Level Control(If Equipped) This feature keeps the rearof your vehicle levelas the load changes. It is automatic-- you do not need to adjust anything.
4-31 Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the If you do, here are some important points: vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” 0 There are many different laws, including speed limit that appears later in this section. But trailering is restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure different than just driving your vehicle by itself. your rig will be legal, not only where you live but Trailering means changes in handling, durability and also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct information can be state or provincial police. equipment, and it has to be used properly. 0 Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch That’s the reason for this part. In it are many dealer about sway controls. time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. 0 Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles Many of these are important foryour safety and that of (1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, your passengers. So please read this section carefully axle or other parts could be damaged. before you pull a trailer. 0 Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your against the drag of the added weight. The engineis engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under heavier loads. greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing 0 Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. the pulling requirements. Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 kmh)) to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-32 Three important considerations have todo with weight: In Canada, write to: the weight of the trailer, General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 0 the weight of the trailer tongue 1908 Colonel Sam Drive and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires. Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Weight of the Trailer Tongue How heavy can a trailer safely be? The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg). But weight to measure because it affects the total or gross even that can be too heavy. weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle trailer are all important. And, it can also depend onany will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your special equipmentthat you have on your vehicle. Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or vehicle’s maximum load capacity. advice, or you can write us at: Buick Motor Division, Customer Relations Center 902 E. Hamilton Avenue Flint, MI 48550
4-33 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Tire Loading Information label located at the rear edgeof the driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. A B Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer 0 The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of hitch that does not attach to the bumper. the total loaded trailer weight (B). 0 Will you have to make any holes in the body of your After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer. monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.
4-34 Safety Chains driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself. You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue Before you start, check the trailer hitchand platform of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road (and attachments), safety chains, electricalconnector, if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has about safety chains may be provided by the hitch electric brakes, start your vehicleand trailer moving and manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure manufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety the brakes are working. This letsyou check your chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always electrical connection at the same time. leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the And, never allow safety chains to dragon the ground. load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes Trailer Brakes are still working. Does your trailer have its own brakes?Be sure to read and Following Distance follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakes so you’ll be Stay at least twice as farbehind the vehicle ahead as you able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake and sudden turns. systems won’t workwell, or at all. Passing Driving with a Trailer You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal Before setting out forthe open road, you’ll want to get longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a Then, to movethe trailer to the left, just move that hand different turn signal. flasher and/or extra wiring. Check to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your with your Buick dealer. The green arrows on your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn possible, have someone guideyou. or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, Making Turns change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your NOTICE: instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers Making very sharp turns while trailering could behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer cause the trailer to come in contact with the bulbs are still working. vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a trailer lighting system into yourvehicle’s lighting system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well they’re all working. Once you disconnect the trailer in advance. lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out.
4-36 Driving On Grades When You Are Ready to Leave After Reduce speed and shift ato lower gear before you start Parking on a Hill down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down down, you might have to use your brakesso much that while you: they would get hot andno longer work well. 0 Start your engine;
Parking on Hills 0 Shift into a gear; and
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer 0 Release the parking brake. attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured,and both 2. Let up on the brake pedal. your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. But if you ever have to park yourrig on a hill, here’s 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. how to doit: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet. 2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift toPARK (P). 5. Release the regular brakes.
4-37 Maintenance When Trailer Towing Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re Your cooling system may temporanly overheat during pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating” on this.Things that are especially important in trailer in the Index. operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
4-38 Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occuron the road.
5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5-23 If a TireGoes Flat 5-3 Other Warning Devices 5-23 Changing a FlatTire 5-3 Jump Starting 5-36 CompactSpare Tire 5-8 Towing Your Vehicle 5-37 If You’re Stuck: In Sand,Mud, 5- 13 Engine Overheating Ice or Snow .5- 15 Cooling System
5-1 ,'. Hazard Warning Flashers I Press the buttonto make your front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key in,is . and even if the key isn'tin.
To turn off the flashers, pull out the collar.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn' signallamps will flash on andoff. When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals won't work. Other Warning Devices NOTICE: If you carry reflective triangles,you can set oneup at the side of the road about300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Remember that ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be Jump Starting covered by your warranty. If your battery has run down, youmay want to use Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your it won’t work, and itcould damage your vehicle. vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely. 1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE: I Batteries canhurt you. They can be dangerous because: If the othersystem isn’t a 12-volt system witha 0 They contain acid that can burn you. negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. 0 They contain gas that can explode or ignite. 0 They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things canhurt you.
5-3 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching NOTICE: each other. If they are, it could cause a ground I connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to If you leave your radio on,it could be badly start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be coveredby damage the electrical systems. your warranty. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put your automatic 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. transaxle in PARK (P) before setting the parking brake. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well An electric fan can start up even when the engine as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, batteries. In addition, it could save your radio! clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
5-4 5. Find the positive(+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. 6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have looseor Using a match neara battery cancause battery missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, The vehicles could be damaged, too.
~~ and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if Before you connect the cables, hereare some basic you need more light. things you shouldknow. Positive (+) will go to Be sure the battery hasenough water. You don’t positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal enginepart. Don’t connect positive(+) to need to addwater to theACDelco Freedom@ negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if the battery and maybe otherparts, too. a battery has fiilercaps, besure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add waterto take care m of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could CAUTION: be present. A Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Fans or other moving engineparts can injureyou ’ Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in badly. Keep your handsaway from moving parts ’ your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with: once the engine is running. , water andget medical help immediately. -~ .
5-5 8. Don’t let the other end of the cable touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to 7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) the good battery’s terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a negative (-) terminal. remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engineof the vehicle with the dead battery.
5-6 13. Remove the cablesin reverse order. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal.
10. Attach the cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connection just is as good there, but the chanceof sparks getting back to the A. Heavy Metal EnginePart battery is much less. B . Good Battery 11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. C. Dead Battery 12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries,it probably needs service.
5-7 Towing Your Vehicle When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know that this manual contains detailed towing Try to have a dealer or professionala towing service tow instructions and illustrations. The operatormay want to your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. see them. If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions and illustrations may not be correct. Before you do anything,turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towing service: 0 That your vehicle can only be towed with certain equipment, as described later in this section. That your vehicle has front-wheel drive. The make, model and year of your vehicle. Whether you can still move the shift lever. If there was an accident, what was damaged.
5-8 - - To help avoid injury toyou or others: A vehicle can fall from a car carrierif it isn’t 0 Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is adequately secured. This can cause a collision, being towed. serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The 0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or 0 Never tow with damaged parts not steel cables before it is transported. fully secured. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, 0 Never get under your vehicle after it has canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp been lifted by the tow truck. edges underneath the towed vehicle. Alwaysuse 0 Always secure the vehicle on each side with T-hooks inserted in theT-hook slots. Never use separate safety chains when towing it. J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and 0 Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead. suspension components.
5-9 Front Towing Attach T-hook chains on both sides in the slotted holes in the bottom of the cradle, behind the front wheels.
Position a 4” x 4” wood beam across sling chains contacting the bottom of the radiator support. Position the lower slingcrossbar directly under the front bumper.
5-10 Rear Towing Tow Limits -- 55 mph (90 km/h), 500 miles (800 km) F Attach T-hook chains to slots in the bottomof the floor pan directly ahead of the rear wheels on both sides.
A 4 ” x 4 ” wood beam is not needed.
Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of each control arm.
5-11 i~
Position the lower sling crossbar directly behind &d at , Attach a separate.safety chain &oundthe outboard,end the lower edgeof the rear bumper coyer. of each lower controlarm.
5-12 .#I. Engine Overheating You will find a coolant light or a warning light about a I hot engine on your vehicle’s instrument panel.If you have the optional gage cluster, you mayalso have a Steam from an overheated engine can burn you coolant temperature warning gage. See “Engine Coolant badly, evenif you just open the hood. Stay away Temperature Warning Light’’ or “Engine Coolant from theengine if you seeor hearsteam coming Temperature Gage”in the Index. from it. Just turn itoff and get everyoneaway from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids itin can catchfire. You or others could be badly burned. Stopyour engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine iscool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
5-13 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive.Just to be safe, drive slower for If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes on, you can drive normally. the engine canget a little too hot when you: If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your Climb a long hill on a hot day. vehicle right away. Stop after high-speed driving. If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine Idle for long periods in traffic. for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the Tow a trailer. warning, turn ofSthe engine and get everyone out of the If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, vehicle until it cools down. try this for a minute or so: You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service 1. Turn off your air conditioner. help right away. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL(N); otherwise, shift to thehighest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)or THIRD (3).
5-14 Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift thehood, here’s what you’ll see: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant insidethe coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Radiator Pressure Cap C. Electric Engine Fans
5-15 Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’ttouch them. If you do, you can beburned. Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant.That could cause an engine fire, andyou could be burned. Get any leak fixedbefore you drive thevehicle.
The coolant levelshould be at or abovethe FULL NOTICE: COLD mark. I If it isn’t, you may have a leak inthe radiator hoses, Engine damage from running yourengine heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere elsein without coolant isn’t covered byyour warranty. the cooling system. ~ ~~~~~ If there seemsto be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine coolingfans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
5-16 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank I NOTICE: If you haven’t found a problemyet, but the coolant level isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@ engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture. “Eng * 3 Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant.
5-17 - - - ’n CAUTION: I -I = I You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and itwill burn if the engine parts arehot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank atis the FULL COLD mark, start yourvehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.
5-18 Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are underpressure, andif you turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out at high speed. Neverturn thecap when the cooling system,including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling systemand radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn the pressurecap.
5-19 How to Add Coolant tothe Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
5-20 ~ i 3. Fill the radiator with the properDEX-COOL@ 4. Then fill the coolant recoverytank to’the FULL coolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. COLD mark. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more 5. \Put the cap backon the coolant recoverytank, but information about the proper coolant mixture.) leave the radiator pressure capoff.
? I
5-21 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the engine cooling fans. filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be surethe 7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator arrows on the pressure cap lineup like this. filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
5-22 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire It’s unusual for a tire to“blow out” while you’re driving, If a tire goes flat,avoid further tire and wheel damage especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. warning flashers. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: I If a front tire fails, the flat willtire create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the I accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firrnly. Changing a tire cancause an injury. The vehicle Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to can slip off the jack androll over you or other a stop well out of the traffic lane. people. You and they could be badly injured. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, actsmuch like a Find a level place to change your tire. To help skid and may require the same correction you’d usein a prevent the vehicle from moving: skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot fromthe ’ 1. Set theparking brake firmly. accelerator pedal. Get thevehicle under controlby ~ 2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). steering the way you want the vehicle to go. Itmay be 3. Thrn off the engine. very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front andrear of the If a tire goes flat,the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tiresafely. tire farthestaway from the one being changed. That would be the tireon the otherside of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-23 Removing the Spare Tire andTools
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. Pull the The followingsteps will tell you how to use the jackand carpeting fromthe floor of the trunk. change a tire.
5-24 Turn the center retainerbolt The box that stores the jack on the spare tire cover to the and wrench is on the r left (counterclockwise) to passenger side trunk wall. remove it. Open the box and then remove the wing bolt by turning it to the left (counterclockwise).
Lift and remove the cover. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section for more information about the Remove the jack and wheel wrench. compact spare. Remove the spare tire fromthe trunk.
5-25 Removing Wheel Covers and Wheel Nut Caps
r" L.1- -
The tools you'll be using include thejack (A) and wheel wrench (B).
If your vehicle has an aluminum wheel with a center cover that hides the wheel nuts, remove the center cover by using the flat end of the wrench to pry it off.
5-26 If your vehicle has a If your vehicle has this wheel cover, remove it by aluminum wheel, you may using the flat endof the have plastic wheel nut caps. wheel wrench. Use the wheel nut wrench to remove the wheel nut caps and to loosen the wheel nuts.
Pry along the edgeof the wheel coveruntil it comes off. When reinstalling the decorativenut caps, tighten the Be careful, the rim edgesmay be sharp. Don’t try to caps snugly with the wheel wrench, then continue remove it with your bare hands. one-quarter rotation to secure plastic caps. Note: When replacing any wheel cover, carefully line up the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover.
5-27 If your vehicle has wire 2. Using the flat endof the wheel covers, remove them key wrench handle, as follows: between the wire wheel cover and the center cap, pry off the center cap.
1. Use the wire wheel key wrench to remove the wheel cover. 3. Remove the theft-deterrent nut, by placing the key end of the wire wheel key wrench over the nut and turning it to the left. Pull off the wire wheel cover. Store it in the trunk until the flat tire is repaired or replaced.
Note: When replacing the wheel cover, carefully line up the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover. 5-28 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
2. Turn the wheel wrench to the right (clockwise) by hand to raise the jack head until it fits under the vehicle.
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts, but don’t remove them.
5-29 /1\ CAUTION:
Getting under avehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badlyinjured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.-1
IO” (25 cm) 8”(20 cm)
~ Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly 3. Put thejack into a notch in the frame which is located near each wheelwell. The front notch is positioned can damage the vehicle and even 10 inches (25 cm) back from the frontwheel well. make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal The rear notchis 8 inches (25 cm) forward from the injury andvehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack rear wheel well. lift head into the properlocation before raising the vehicle. 4. Position thejack and raise thejack head until it fits firmly on the ridgein the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire nearyou.
5-30 7. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.
I I
5. Raise the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench to the right (clockwise)in the jack. Raise the vehicle far Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to enough so there’s enough room for the spare tire which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts to fit. become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a 6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper orwire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. 10. Make sure each wheel stud is centered in each wheel hole while tightening the nuts. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. Never use oil or grease on studsor nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could falloff, causing a serious accident. -1 8. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.
9. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.
11. Lower the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench to the left (counterclockwise) on the jack. Lower the jack completely.
5-32 - 12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a NOTICE: crlsscross sequence. Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the propersequence and to the proper torque specification.
I NOTICE: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened you try to put a wheel cover on your compact wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose spare, you could damage the cover or the spare. and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 Nom).
5-33 Storing the Flat Tire and Tools Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible. Store thejack and wheel wrench in their box in the trunk on the passenger’s side.
Storing ajack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.proper the in 1 After you’ve put the compact sparetire on your vehicle, you’ll need to store the flat tire in yourtrunk. Use the following procedure to securethe flat tirein the trunk.
5-34 Storing the Spare Tireand Tools
5 3
1 Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could 7 cause injury. Ina sudden stopor collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. 2 The compact spareis for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section.See 1. Jack the storing instructions labelto replace your compact 2. Wheel Wrench spare intoyour trunk properly. 3. Wing Bolt 4. Tire 5. Cover 6. Bolt
5-35 Compact Spare Tire Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles. Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when And don’t mix your compact sparetire or wheel with your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be tire and its wheel together. 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your NOTICE: spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using (1 05 kmh) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), them can damage your vehicle and can damage so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire the chains too. Don’t usetire chains on your repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best compact spare. to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire andwheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
5-36 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow NOTICE: What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your to spin your wheels too fast. The method knownas vehicle as well as thetires. If you spin the wheels “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but too fast while shifting your transaxle back and you must use caution. forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
0 For information about using tire chains onyour vehicle, I see “Tire Chains” in the Index. If you let your tires spinat high speed, they can Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will the transaxleor other parts of the vehicle can clear thearea around your front wheels. If your vehicle overheat. That could cause an engine has traction control, you should turn the system off. (See compartment fireor otherdamage. When you’re “Traction Control System” in the Index.) Then shift stuck, spin thewheels as littleas possible. Don’t back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and a forward spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 kmh) as shown gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release on the speedometer. the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
5-37 fi NOTES
5-38 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the careof your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. Thereis also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2 Service 6-46 Appearance Care 6-3 Fuel 6-47 Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle 6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6-49 Care of Safety Belts 6-5 Filling Your Tank 6-49 Cleaning Glass Surfaces 6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6-50 Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle 6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6-52 Cleaning Tires 6-1 1 Engine Oil 6-52 Sheet Metal Damage 6-15 Air Cleaner 6-52 Finish Damage 6-18 Automatic Transaxle Fluid 6-53 Appearance Care Materials Chart 6-20 Engine Coolant 6-54 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6-23 Radiator Pressure Cap 6-54 Service Parts Identification Label 6-24 Power Steering Fluid 6-54 Electrical System 6-24 Windshield Washer Fluid 6-59 Replacement Bulbs 6-26 Brakes 6-60 Capacities and Specifications 6-29 Battery 6-60 Air Conditioning Refrigerants 6-30 Bulb Replacement 6-60 Engine Specifications 6-38 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6-6 1 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6-38 Tires 6-6 1 Vehicle Dimensions
6-1 Service --ngYour Own Service Work Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to 11 you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for want to use the proper Buick Service Manual. It tells all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GMparts and you much more about how to service your vehicle than GM-trained and supported service people. this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GMparts have one of these marks: Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. A You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any servicework you CTPwine perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2 Fuel 1 A CAUTION: Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications You can. be injured and yourvehicle could be ASTM D4814 in the United States andCGSB 3.5-M93 damaged if you try to doservice work on a in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been vehicle without knowing enough about it. developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association (MA)for better vehicle performance Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, and engine protection. Gasolines meeting theAAMA experience, the properreplacement parts specification could provide improved driveability and tools before you attempt ariy vehicle and emission control system protection comparedto maintenance task. other gasolines. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts and Be sure the posted octaneis at ‘least87. If the octaneis other fasteners.c6English’’ and “metric” less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when fasteners canbe easily confused.If you use you drive. If it’s bad enough,it can. damage yourengbe. the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could behurt. If you’re using fuel rated 87at octane or higher andyou .hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when Adding Equipment to the Outsideof you’re accelerating or driving uphill. a That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octanefuel to get -rid Your Vehicle of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means Things you might add to the outsideof your vehicle-can you have a problem. affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Cheqk with your dealer before adding equipment to the outsideof your vehicle.
6-3 If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control are now required to contain additives that will help label), it is designed to operate on fuelsthat meet prevent deposits from formingin your engine and fuel California specifications. If such fuels arenot available system, allowing your emission control system to in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuelsmeeting anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing federal specifications, but emission control system oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on and/or your help clean the air. General Motorsrecommends that you vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return use these gasolines if they comply with the to your authorized Buick dealer fordiagnosis to specifications described earlier. determine the cause of failure. In theevent it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. I NOTICE: Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel metal parts in your fuel system and also damage contains MMT. General Motors doesnot recommend the plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT areused, be covered under your warranty. spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on yourinstrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Buick dealer forservice.
6-4 Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada,the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil companythat does business in the country where you’ll be driving. You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re goingand give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). General Motors Overseas DistributionCorporation 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, OntarioL 1H 8P7 The cap isbehind a hinged door on the driver’s side of your vehicle.
6-5 I A CAUTION: I Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don’t smokeif you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right. While refueling, hang the tethered cap from the hookon the fuel door.
6-6 When you put the cap back on,turn it to the right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel caphas been left off or If you get gasolineon yourself and then improperly installed. Thiswould allow fuel to something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. evaporate into the atmosphere.See “Malfunction Gasoline can spray outon you if you open the Indicator Lamp”in the Index. fuel filler captoo quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler capslowly and NOTICE: wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the capall the way. If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from cause your malfunction indicator lampto light painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the and yourfuel tank andemissions system may be Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index. damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
6-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under theHood
A I ,ACAUTION:
~ Never filla portable fuel contamer while it is in An electric fan under thehood can start up and your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the injure you even when the engine is notrunning. container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any be badly burned and yourvehicle damaged if this underhood electric fan. occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others: Dispense gasoline onlyinto approved r containers. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than theground. Things that burncan get onhot engine parts and Bring thefill nozzle in contact with the start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, inside of the fill opening before operating oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and the nozzle. Contact should be maintained other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others until thefilling is complete. could beburned. Be careful not to drop orspill 0 Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline. things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-8 Hood Release To open the hood, first pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. It is next to the parking brake pedal near the floor.
Then go to the frontof the vehicle and pullup on the secondary hood release. The hood latch is under the hood, near the center, and at the front edgeof the grille. Lift up on the lever as you lift up on the hood. Before closing the hood,be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then just pullthe hood down and close it firmly.
6-9 3800 Series 11 Engine (L36 - Code K) When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A. Engine Coolant D. Engine Oil Dipstick G. Brake Master Cylinder Recovery Tank E. Engine Oil Fill Cap H. Air Cleaner B. Battery E Automatic Transaxle I. Windshield Washer C. Radiator Pressure Cap Fluid Dipstick Fluid Reservoir 6-10 Engine Oil The engine oil dipstick is right behind the engine If the CHECK OIL LEVEL fans and in front of the light on the instrument engine oil fill cap. Thetop CHECK panel comes on, it means of the dipstick is a round, O1 LEVEL you need to check your yellow loop. engine oil level right away. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil For more information, see“Check Oil Level Light” in dipstick might not show the Index. You should check your engine oillevel the actual level. regularly; this is an added reminder. It’s a good idea to check your engine oilevery time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
6-11 Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the,way.’Removeit again, to add at least one quartof oil. But you must use the keeping the tip down, and check thelevel.. I fight kind. This part explains what kindof oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oii.If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damage4a.
The engine oil fill capis behind the engine oil dipstick and engine fans. Be sure tofill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range.hsh the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS Oils recommended for yourvehicle can be identified by FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API).Do not use any oil which LOOK does not carry this Starburst symbol. HOT FOR MIS WEATHER SYMBOL ’ If you change your own __ oil, be sureyou use oil “c‘ that has the Starburst + 38 symbol on the frontof the oil container. If you have + 27 your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine isAmerican Petroleum Institutecertified for easoline engines. I I U U
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart: ?I SAE SW-30 i- 6-13 As shown in the chart, SAE 1OW-30 is best for your Engine Oil Additives vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going to be colder than 60°F (16°C) before your next Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to oil change. When it’s very cold, you should use advise if you think something should be added. SAE 5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show When to Change EngineOil its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city maintenance schedule: 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). NOTICE: This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines 0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can resultin engine damage not 0 Most trips are through dusty areas. covered by your warranty. 0 You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle. GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for 0 The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi your vehicle. or other commercial application. If you are in an area where the temperature falls Driving under these conditions causes engineoil to below -20°F (-29”C), consider using either an break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter will provide easier cold starting and better protection every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever for your engine at extremely low temperatures. occurs first. (See “Change Oil Soon Light” in the Index.) 6-14 If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway Air Cleaner maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever The air cleaner and filter are onthe driver’s sideof the occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine compartment. engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower. (See “Change Oil Soon Light”in the Index.) What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t letused oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containingused engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil canbe a real threat to the environment.If you change your own oil,be sure to drainall free-flowing 1. Remove the screws on the air cleaner housing cover oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead, recycle it by takingit to a place that collectsused oil. If you have a problem properly disposingof your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. 6-15 r 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air intakehose. This will allow you to lift the rearportion of the air cleaner. 4. After detaching the hose from the throttle body, pull back the entire rear portion of the aircleaner by pulling upward and rearward. 2. Remove the air intake hosethat is snapped over the throttle body by pulling the hose upward and away from thethrottle body which is located near the top of the engine. 6-16 /!\ CAUr Operating theengine with the air cleaneroff can cause you or othersto be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleansthe air, it stopsflame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with it off, and be carefulworking on the engine with the air cleaner off. 5. Replace the air filter. I NOTICE: 6. Reinstall the rear section of the air cleaner. ___~~ If the air cleaner is off, a backfire cancause a 7. Reconnect the electricalconnector. damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get 8. Reattach the air intake hoseby snapping it back onto into your engine, which willdamage it. Always the throttle body. have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to replace the air filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index. 6-17 ~~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~~~ ~~~~ Automatic Transaxle Fluid NOTICE: When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid Too much or too little fluid can damage your level is when the engine oil is changed. transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts Change both the fluid and filter every50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to or moreof these conditions: get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid. In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90°F (32" C) or higher. Wait at least30 minutes before checkingthe transaxle In hilly or mountainous terrain. fluid levelif you have been driving: When doing frequent trailer towing. 0 When outside temperatures are above90°F (32" C). Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. At high speed for quite a while. If you donot use your vehicle underany of these 0 In heavy traffic -- especially in hotweather. conditions, the fluid and filterdo not require changing. While pulling a trailer. See "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Index. To get the right reading, the fluid shouldbe at normal How to Check operating temperature,which is 180°F to 200°F Because this operation can be a little difficult,you may (82°C to 93°C). choose to have this done at your Buick dealership Get the vehiclewarmed up by driving about15 miles Service Department. (24 km)when outside temperaturesare above I If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions 50°F (10°C).If it's colder than50°F ( lO"C), you here, or you could geta false reading on the dipstick. may have to drivelonger. 6-18 - Checking theFluid Level 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipeit with a clean rag or paper towel. 0 Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 2. Push it back in all the way, waitlthree secondsand then pull it back out again. 0 With the parking brake applied, place theshift lever in PARK (P). 0 With your footon the brake pedal, moveathe shift lever through each gear range, pausing for ,about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift leverin PARK (P). 0 Let, the enginekn at idle for three to five minutes. Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps: The transaxle fluid dipstick top is a round '.loop andis next to the brake master cylinder 3. Check both sidesof the dipstick, and read th,e behind the engine' block. lower level. The fluid level mustin be the cross-hatched area. I... . 4. If the fluid level is in the acce!ptable range, push the dipstick backin all theway. .. . 6-19 How to Add Fluid 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.” Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of transaxle fluid touse. See “Recommended 4. When the correct mid level is obtained, push the Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. dipstick back in all the way. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper Engine Coolant fluid to bring the levelin@ .~ecross-hatched area on the dipstick. The cooling s stem in your vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolantis designed 1. Pull out the dipstick. to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles 2. Using a long-neck funnel,add enough fluid at the (240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than The following explains your cooling system and one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overji22. how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. NOTICE: A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@ coolant will: We recommend you use only fluid labeled Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle. Give boiling protection up to 265 “F(129 “C). Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 Protect against rust and corrosion. is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. 0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. 6-20 What to Use NOTICE: Use a mixtureof one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-halfDEX-COOL’ coolant which When adding coolant, is important thatyou it won’t damage aluminumparts. .Ifyou use this mixture, use onlyDEX-COOL@ (silicate-free) coolant. you don’t need to add anything else. If coolant other thanDEX-COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner -- at I 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, ’ Adding only plain water to yourcooling system whichever occurs first.Damage caused by the can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@is not , liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper covered by your new vehiclewarranty. coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror thewrong mixture, your engine could get toohot butyou wouldn’t get the overheatwarning. Your engine could catch fireand you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant. 6-21 Checking Coolant NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine couldoverheat andbe badly damaged. The repaircost wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixturecan freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heatercore and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, ., i. have yourdealer check your cooling system. NOTICE: When your engineis cold, thecoolant level shouldbe If you use the propercoolant, you don't have to at FULL COLD or a littlehigher. When your engine add extra inhibitorsor additives which claim to is warm, the level shouldbe up to FULL HOT or a improve the system. These can be harmful. little higher. .. 6-22 ,. Adding Coolant Radiator Pressure Cap If you need more coolant,add the proper DEX-COOL' coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it. NOTICE: Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and mustbe tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible enginedamage Turning theradiator pressure cap when the from overheating. Be sure the arrowson the cap engine and radiator arehot canallow steam and line up with the overflow tube on the radiator scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. filler neck. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to addcoolant at the radiator. When you replace your radiator pressure cap, aGM cap Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a is recommended. little -- when the engine and radiator arehot. Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts arehot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine. 6-23 .. I' Power Steering Fluid How To Check Power SteeringFluid When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the and cap the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and When to Check Power SteeringFluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid-unlessyou suspect there is a leakin the systemor you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.,. 6-24 Adding Washer Fluid NOTICE: ,--: ’ -.. . -. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. 0 Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. 0 Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters fullwhen it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tankif it is Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add completely full. washer fluid until the tank is full. 0 Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. 6-25 Brakes of the brake system.If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your Brake Fluid brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings areworn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. - A C XJTION: If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled fluid only when work is done on the brake with DOT-3 brake fluid. hydraulic system. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid levelin the reservoir mightgo down. The first is that the brake fluid When yourbrake fluid fallsto a low level, your brake goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake warning light will come on.A chime will sound if you lining wear. When new liningsare put in, the fluid level try to drive with this warning light on. See “Brake goes back up. The other reasonis that fluid is leaking out System Warning Light’’ in the Index. 6-26 What toAdd When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 NOTICE: brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11@ (GM Part No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed Using the wrong fluid can badly damage container only. brake system parts. For example, just a few Always clean the brake fluid reservoir capand the area drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine around the cap before removing it. This will help keep oil, in your brake system can damage brake dirt from entering the reservoir. system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. I A CAU IN: 0 If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid system, your brakes may not work well, or they on your vehicle. If you do, washit off may not even work at all. This could cause a immediately. See “Appearance Care” in crash. Always use the proper brakefluid. the Index. 6-27 Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are firstapplied or lightly Your vehicle has front discbrakes and rear drum brakes. applied. This doesnot mean something is wrong with Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that your brakes. make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake See “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” in pads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic may come and go orbe heard all the time your vehicle Maintenance Inspections.” is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads forwear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications. Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the your brakes won’t workwell. That could leadto rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete NOTICE: axle sets. I See “Brake SystemInspection” in Section 7 of Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance could result in costly brake repair. Inspections.” 6-28 Brake Pedal Travel Battery See yourdeder if the brake pedal does not return to Every new Buick has an ACDelco Freedom@ battery. normal height, orif there is a rapid increase in pedal You never have to add water to ofone these. When it’s travel. This could be a signof brake trouble. time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement Brake Adjustment number shown onthe original battery’s label. Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving,your brakes adjust for wear. Vehicle Storage If you’re not going to driveyour vehicle for25 days or more, Replacing Brake System Parts remove the black, negative(-) cable fromthe battery. This The.braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. will help keepyour battery fkom running down. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well m together if the vehicleis to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed, and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system -- for example, when your brakeliningswear Batteries have acid that can burn you gasand down and you haveto have new ones putin -- be sure that can explode.You can be badly hurtif you you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you aren’t careful. See“Jump Starting’’ in the Index don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For for tips on working around a battery without example, if someone putsin brake linings that ,are wrong getting hurt. for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can changein Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your many other waysif someone puts in the wrong vehicle for longer storage periods. replacement brake parts. Also; for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index. Bulb Replacement Headlamps For any bulb changingprocedure not listed in this This procedure is for both the driver’s and passenger’s section, contact your dealer’s service department. side headlamps. For thebulb types to be used in the following procedures, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst ifyou drop or scratch the bulb.You or others couldbe injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. 1. Use a 10 mm hex socket to remove two bolts retaining the headlamp assembly. 6-30 2. Slide the headlamp outboard until the pins are loose. 4. Rotate the bulb retainer to the left 3. Remove the headlamp assembly to access the bulbs. (counterclockwise) to remove the bulbassembly. 6-31 5. Pull the tabs away from the bulb base to remove the 6. Push the new bulb straight onto the retainer. bulb fromthe retainer. 7. Reverse these steps to replace the bulb assembly. Front Tbrn Signal The front turn signal bulbs can be accessed from under the front of the vehicle. Reach up from under the vehicle and, while pushing in the tab on the bulb assembly, turn assembly to the left (counterclockwise) and remove. Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out of the retainer. Replace the bulb and turn the bulb assembly back into place. 6-32 Cornering Lamps Follow the same procedure asused for replacing the headlamps. However, to remove the cornering lamp bulb, turnthe bulb assembly to the left (counterclockwise) and pull the bulb straight out. Trunk Mounted Back-up and Taillamps 2. Pull out the assembly. 1. Loosen and remove the eight fasteners (four per side) that hold the assembly in place. The assembly for both sides is onepiece. The entire piece must be removed to replace any bulbs. 6-33 3. Push in the tab and turn the bulb assembly to the left 4. Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out. (counterclockwise) to remove it. 6-34 Rear Turn Signals 1. Open the trunk. Turn the screw to the left (counterclockwise) located just insideof the trunk and remove. 2. Pull the carpet away from the rear area to access the turn signal bulb assembly. 3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarterturn to the left (counterclockwise), while pressingit firmly. 4. Pull the bulb socket straight outof the assembly. 5. Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out. 6. Replace with a new bulb by pushing the bulb straight into the socket until the bulb clicks into place. 5. Replace the bulb and reverse the steps to install the 7. Turn the bulb socket one-quarterturn into the new bulb assembly. assembly to lock it back into place. 8. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb assembly. 6-35 Headlamp Aiming 0 Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension. Your vehicle has the composite headlampsystem. These headlamps have horizontal and vertical aim indicators. NOTICE: The aim has been pre-set at the factory and should need no further adjustment . To make sure your headlamps are aimed If your vehicle is damaged in anaccident and the properly, read all the instructions before headlamp aim seems to be affected, see your dealer. beginning. Failure to follow these instructions Headlamps on damaged vehicles may require could cause damage to headlamp parts. recalibration of the horizontal aimby your dealer. To check the aim, the vehicle should be properly Open the hood and locate the vertical aim level (A) that prepared as follows: you can see through the top of the headlamp. Place the vehicle on a level pad or surface. ulIt is recommended that 0 The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud the upper limit not exceed attached to it. plus 0.4 degrees from The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other the center of the bubble. work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done. Other drivers may flash their high beams at you if 0 There should not be any cargo or loading of the your adjustment is much vehicle, except it shouldhave a full tank of fuel and above plus 0.4 degrees. one person or 160 lbs. (75 kg) on the driver’s seat. Tires should be properly inflated. 6-36 For the vertical adjustment, state inspection stations 3. Check the horizontal aim generally will allow a readingof plus 0.76 degreesor (C) and adjust as minus 0.76 degrees from the center of the bubble. necessary. The horizontal If you find that the headlamp aiming needs adjustment, aiming device is located follow these steps: on the inboard sideof each lamp. Turn the Adjustment screws can be turned with E8an Tome’ horizontal aiming socket orT15 Tom screwdriver. screw (D) until the screw aligns with the zero“0”. f- 4. Recheck the vertical aim(A) to make sureit is still correct after the horizontalaim adjustment. i‘ Re-adjust as necessary. 1. Locate the vertical aiming screw(B) that is directly behind the headlamp assembly. 2. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the bubble i inside the level (A) is centered at zero“0”. 6-37 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm. For the proper windshield wiper blade replacement length and type, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index. Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Buick Warranty booklet for details. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the Overloading your tires can cause type with a releasehole: overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious I. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield. accident. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in the Index. 2. Insert a small screwdriverinto the hole (A) and pull ~ CAUTION: (Continued) the blade assembly off the wiper arm (B). 6-38 - CAUTION: (Continued) NOTICE: 0 Underinflated tirespose the samedangeras Don’t let anyone tell youthat underinflation or overloaded tires. The resulting accident overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires could cause serious injury.Check all tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can frequently to maintain the,recommended get the following: pressure. Tire pressureshould be checked Too much flexing when your tiresare cold. 0 Too much heat 0 Overinflated tiresare more likely to’ be Tire overloading cut, punctured or brokenby a sudden 0 Bad wear impact -- such as when youhit a pothole.. J Bad handling Keep tires at the recommended pressure. 0 Bad fuel economy. 0 Worn, old tires cancause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, ,or if your tireshave If your tires have toomuch air (overinflation), been damaged, replace them. you can get the following: 0 Unusual wear Bad handling Inflation -- Tire Pressure 0 Rough ride 1 The Tire-Loading Information label, whichis on the 0 Needless damage from road hazards. rear edgeof the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressuresfor your tires when’they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehiclehas been sittingfor at least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km). 6-39 When to Check The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore Check your tires once a month or more. uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled 60 psi (420 Wa). rotation intervals. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire 1 pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure toput the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual When rotating your tires, always use the correct wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check rotation pattern shown here. wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or Don’t include the compact spare tire in your wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and tire rotation. “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information. 6-40 After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front When It’s Time for New Tires and rear inflationpressures as shown on the Tire-Loading Information label. Makecertain that all One way to tell when it’s wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut time for new tires is to Torque” in the hdex. check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom places where the wheel You need a new tire if any of the following statements attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can are true: use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be You can see the indicators at three or more places sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you around the tire. need to, to get all therust or dirtoff. (See “Changing a Flat Tire” in theIndex.) You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. 0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage. 6-41 Buying New Tires To find outwhat kind and size of tires you need, look at A CAUTION: the Tire-Loading Information label. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types number on each tire’s sidewall. Whenyou get new tires, (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way ’ handle properly, and you could have a crash. your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed Using tires of different sizes may also cause to giveproper endurance, handling, speed rating, damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the same traction, ride and other things during normal service on size and type tires on all wheels. your vehicle. If your tireshave an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” It’s all right to drivewith your compact spare, (for mud and snow). though. It was developedfor use on your vehicle. If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many.miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. 6-42 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear The following information relates to the system The treadwear grade is a comparativerating based developed by the United States National Highway on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled Traffic Safety Administration,which grades tires by conditions on aspecified government test course. treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires car tires. The Uniform TireQuality Grading system does depends upon the actual conditions of their use, not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires, however, and may depart significantly from the norm space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with due to variations in driving habits, service practices nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), and differences in road characteristics and climate. or to some limited-productiontires. Traction -- A, B, C While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are A, B, grades, they must also conform to Federalsafety and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on requirements and additional General Motors Tire wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. 6-43 Temperature -- A, B, C Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of alignment may need to bereset. If you notice your heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under vehicle vibrating when driving ona smooth road, your controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory wheels may need to be rebalanced. test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, Wheel Replacement and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked,or badly rusted performance which all passenger car tires must meet or corroded.If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum performance on the laboratory test wheel than the wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your rninimum required by law. dealer if any of these conditions exist. Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. established for a tire that is properly inflated and not Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the excessive loading, either separately or in combination, same way as the one itreplaces. can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life Buick model. and best overall performance. 6-44 Used Replacement Wheels ~ --.. :,;,,-.-’,’,. ’ .1 . A CAUTION: ib.:,::: c: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel :.’F bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is handling of your vehicle, make your tireslose dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor air andmake you lose control. You could have a how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly collision in which you or otherscould be injured. and cause an accident. If you have to replace a Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts and wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel. wheel nuts forreplacement. I NOTICE: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. Tire Chains Never use these to clean your vehicle: Gasoline NOTICE: 0 Benzene Naphtha Use tire chains only where legal and only when 0 Carbon Tetrachloride you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains that arethe propersize for your tires. Install 0 Acetone them on the front tires andtighten them as 0 Paint Thinner tightly as possible with the ends securely Turpentine fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the 0 Lacquer Thinner chains contacting your vehicle, stop andretighten 0 Nail Polish Remover them. If the contact continues, slow downuntil it They can all be hazardous -- some more than too stops. Driving fast or spinning the wheels others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. with chains on will damage your vehicle. Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. Appearance Care In many uses, these will damage yourvehicle: Alcohol Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a 0 Laundry Soap match or getthem on ahot part of the vehicle. Some are Bleach dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from acontainer to clean your 0 Reducing Agents vehicle, be sure tofollow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. 6-46 Cleaning the Inside ofYour Vehicle Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner Use a vacuum cleaner often to get ofrid dust and loose on Fabric dirt. Wipe vinyl,leather, plastic and painted surfaces 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. with a clean, damp cloth. 2. Always clean a wholetrim panel or section. Mask Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil 3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on Remover for cleaning fabricand carpet. They will clean the container label to formthick suds. normal spots and stains very well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. “Appearance Careand Materials” in the Index.) Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. Here are some cleaningtips: 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds. 0 Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damptowel or cloth. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry. 0 Carefully scrape off any excess stain. Use a clean cloth or sponge,and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. 0 If a ring forms after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set. 6-47 Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Cleaning Vinyl Stains causedby such thingsas catsup, coffee (black), Use warm water and a clean cloth. egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urineand Rub with a clean, damp clothto remove dirt. You blood canbe removed as follows: may have todo it more than once. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain soiled areawith cool water. if you don’t get themoff quickly. Use a clean 2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior cloth and a vinyl/leathercleaner. See your dealer cleaner instructions describedearlier. for this product. 3. If an odor lingers after cleaningvomit or urine, Cleaning Leather treat the areawith a waterbaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to1 cup (250 ml) Use a soft clothwith lukewarm water and milda soap or of lukewarm water. saddle soapand wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat todry. 4. Let dry. 0 For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner,See your Stains causedby candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili dealer forthis product. sauce andunknown stains canbe removed as follows: Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. cleaners, furniturepolish or shoe polishon leather. 2. First, clean with cool water and allow todry Soiled or stained leather should becleaned completely. immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the 3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for finish, it can harm the leather. Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner. 6-48 Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel Cleaning Glass Surfaces Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM of the instrumentpanel. Sprays containing silicones or Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield will remove normal tobacco smokeand dust films on and even make it difficult to see through the windshield interior glass. under certain conditions. Don't use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they Cleaning Interior Plastic Components may cause scratches.Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. Use only a mild soap and water solution ona soft If abrasive cleaners areused on the insideof the rear cloth or sponge. Commercial cleanersmay affect the window, an electric defogger elementmay be damaged. surface finish. Any temporary license should not be attached across Care of Safety Belts the defogger grid. Keep belts cleanand dry, A CAUTION: Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. 6-49 Cleaning the Outsideof the more frequent application may be required. (See Windshield and Wiper Blades “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index.) If the windshield is not clear after using the Cleaning the Outside ofYour Vehicle windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth when running, wax, sap or othermaterial may be on of color, gloss retention and durability. the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Washing Your Vehicle Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@Powder (non-scratching The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or windshield is clean if beads do not form when you cold water. rinse it with water. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Grime fromthe windshield will stick to the wiper Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials’’ inthe rinse the blade with water. Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum Check the wiper blades and clean themas necessary; based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning replace blades that look worn. agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish Weatherstrips with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply High pressure car washes may cause water to enter silicone grease with a clean cloth atleast every your vehicle. six months. During very cold, damp weather 6-50 Cleaning ExteriorLampskenses droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft clothand a liquid surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If hand, dish or car washing(mild detergent) soap to clean necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that aremarked exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter. “Washing Your Vehicle.” Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather Finish Care and chemical falloutthat can take their toll over a period Occasional. waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by of years. You can help to keep thepaint finish looking hand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products whenever possible. from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Cleaning Aluminum Wheels Your vehicle has a “basecoatklearcoat” paintfinish. (If Equipped) The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. NOTICE: The surfaceof these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your car. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or abrasivecleaning Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on brushes on them because you could damage the surface. a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dullthe finish or leave swirl marks. Don’t take your vehiclethrough an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tirecleaning brushes. These brushes canalso damage the surface Foreign materials such as calcium chlorideand other of these wheels. salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird Cleaning Tires Underbody Maintenance To clean yourtires, use a stiff brush with a tirecleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on NOTICE: the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have When applying a tire dressing always take care corrosion protection. to wipe off any overspray or splash from all At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas the paint finish. of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do Sheet Metal Damage this for you. If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal Chemical Paint Spotting repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create replaced to restore corrosion protection. a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on yourvehicle. This Finish Damage damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode into the paint surface. quickly and may develop into amajor repair expense. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Buick Minor chipsand scratches can berepaired with touch-up will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of materials available from your dealer or other service new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within outlets. Larger areas of finish damagecan be corrected 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, in your dealer’s body and paint shop. whichever occurs first. 6-52 Appearance Care Materials Chart 12377984 I 16 02. (0.473 L) 1 SurfaceCleaner I Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. ** Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl. See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 6-53 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the model designation, paint information and 0 a list of all production options and special equipment. Be surethat this label is not removed from thevehicle Electrical System Add-on Electrical Equipment This is the legal identifier foryour vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front comer of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the I NOTICE: windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle labels and the certificates of title and registration. unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle Engine Identification and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment code will help you identify your engine, specifications can keep other components from working as and replacement parts. they should. Service Parts Identification Label Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. your VIN, 6-54 Headlamp Wiring the passenger sideof the cover. Then remove thecover. The inside of the cover has a chart that explains the The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal features and controls governed by each fuse and relay. circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some casesto remain off. Fuses and Circuit Breakers If this happens, have your headlamp system checked right away. The wiring circuits in your vehicle areprotected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers Windshield Wipers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of damage causedby electrical problems. The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breakerand a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the heavy snow, etc., the wiperwill stop until the motor band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical replace abad fuse with a new one of the identical size problem, be sure to have it fixed. and rating. Power Windows and Other If you ever have aproblem on theroad and don’t have a spare fuse,you can “borrow”onethat has the same Power Accessories amperage. Justpick some featureof your vehicle that Circuit breakersin the fusepanel protect the power you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette windows and other power accessories. When the current lighter -- and use its fuse,if it is the correct amperage. load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, Replace it assoon as you can. protecting the circuit until the problem isfixed or goes There are two fuseblocks in your vehicle: the driver’s away. side and passenger’s side fuseblocks. Maxifuse@/Relay Center To check the fusesin this underhood fuse center, turn the two knobs one-quarterturn to the left (counterclockwise) and loosenthe metal wing nut on Driver’s Side Fuse Block 12345 6 The driver’s side fuseblock is to the left of the steering wheel, under the instrumentpanel. Snap off the cover to reveal the fuses. You’ll find a fuse puller clipped to the inside of the cover. Place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse. Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out. Spare fusesare located in the slots labeled “Spare” on the following chart. When finished, replace the cover by snapping it back up into place. 6-56 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage 1 Not Used 6B Brake and Hazard Lamps 2 Not Used 7B Not Used 3 Power Seats Circuit Breaker 8B Interior Lighting 4 Not Used 9B Cigarette Lighter 5 Not Used IC Air Bag System 1A PASS-Key 2c Spare 2A Spare 3c Not Used 3A Not Used 4c Not Used 4A Not Used 5c Cooling Fans, Transaxle 5A Up-Level HVAC, ALM, Cruise 6C Parking Lamps, Interior Lamps Control, Cluster 7c Not Used 6A Courtesy Lamps, Power Mirrors 8C Parking Lamps 7A Not Used 9c Radio, Cluster 8A Perimeter Lighting ID Telltale, Chime, Cluster, RAC 9A Ashtray, Cigarette Lighter 2D Spare 1B Turn Signal, Back-up Lamps, LCM, BTSI 3D Heated Mirrors 2B Spare 4D Not Used 3B Not Used 5D Base NC 4B Not Used 6D Not Used 5B Anti-Lock Brake System, Computer 7D TCC Command Control 6-57 Fuse Usage 8D Radio 9D Not Used on on 1E Not Used n 0 0. 000 2E Air Bag System, PASS-Key 3E Not Used 4E Not Used 5E Rear Defog POSITIONS 6E Not Used 7E Miscellaneous Engine-Non OBD I1 8E Wipers, Washer no no 9E Not Used 000 uno r------I FUSE I I POSITIONS I Passenger's Side FuseBlock I I Additional fuses are located in the relay center, on I I the passenger's side, below the instrument panel. I I You must remove the sound insulator on the right side of the passenger footwell to replace these fuses. Since thereplacement of these fusescan be difficult, we recommend that you see your dealer for I I fuse replacement. I I I I 6-58 Fuse Usage Replacement Bulbs Door Locks Front Outside Lamps Bulb Trunk Release, RAC Cornering Lamps ...... 3 156 Halogen Headlamps Horns Low-Beam ...... 9006 Not Used High-Beam ...... 9005 5 Miscellaneous Engine Controls Parking/Turn Signal Lamps ...... 3057 6 Fuel Pump Rear Outside Lamps 3156 7 Injectors Back-up Lamps ...... Tail ...... 194 8 Powertrain Control Module Tail/Stop/Turn Signal lamps ...... 3357 9 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 A/C Programmer 12 Not Used 6-59 Capacities and Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerants The following approximate capacities are given in Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. English and metric conversions. Please refer to If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index refrigerant, be surethe proper refrigerant is used. If for more information. you’re not sure, ask your dealer. 3800 SeriesI1 Engine (L36) CodeK 3.8L V6 Engine Specifications Automatic Transaxle (Overdrive) 3800 Series I1 Engine (L36) CodeK Pan Removal and Replacement ... 6.5 quarts (6.1 L) VIN Engine Code ...... K After Complete Overhaul ...... 10 quarts (9.5 L) Type ...... V6 When draining or replacing torque convertor, more fluid may be needed, Displacement ...... 3.8L Cooling System ...... 13 quarts (1 2.3 L) Horsepower ...... 205-hp Engine Crankcase ...... 4.5 quarts (4.3 L) Firing Order ...... 1-6-5-4-3-2 Oil change withfilter change Thermostat Temperature ...... 195°F (91°C) Fuel Tank ...... 18 gallons (68 L) Tire Pressures ...... See Tire-Loading Information label on driver 5. dooK Wheel Nut Torque ...... 100 lb-ft (140 N-m) R-134a Air Conditioning ... See refrigerant charge label under the hood. All capacities are approximate. When adding,be sure to fillto the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. 6-60 Normal Maintenance L36 Engine Accessory Belt Replacement Parts Air Cleaner Filter ...... AC Type A-1096C Engine Oil Filter ...... AC Type PF-47 I Transaxle Filter ...... GM Part No. 865 1909 Spark Plugs ...... AC Type 41-921 Gap: 0.060 inch(1.52 mm) Windshield Wiper Blades Type ...... Pin Length ...... 22 inches (56 cm) C Vehicle Dimensions Length ...... 200 inches (508 cm) Width ...... 73.6 inches (1 86.9 cm) The L36 engine usesan engine accessory belt. This Height ...... 55.7 inches (141.5 cm) diagram shows the features connectedand the routing. Wheelbase ...... 110.8 inches (281.4 cm) See “Maintenance Schedule”in the Index for when to check the belt. Tread Width Front 60.4 inches (153.4 cm) ...... A. Power Steering D. Crank Rear ...... 60.2 inches (152.9 cm) B . Generator E. Coolant Pump C. Air Conditioning F. Tensioner 6-61 fi NOTES 6-62 Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule This section covers the maintenance requiredfor your Buick. Your vehicle needs these services to retain itssafety, dependability and emission control performance. 7-2 Introduction 7-33 Part C: PeriodicMaintenance Inspections 7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-35Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 7-29 Part B: Owner Checksand Services 7-37 Part E: Maintenance Record 7-1 Introduction IMPORTANT. KEEP ENGINE OIL Your Vehicle and the Environment AT THE PROPER Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your LEVEL AND CHANGE AS vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the RECOMMENDED . 8 environment. All recommended maintenance procedures I are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels orthe wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from yourvehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehiclein good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. How This Section is Organized The remainder of this section is divided into five parts: “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan what to have doneand how often. Someof these supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your services can be complex, so unless you are technically Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your Buick qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should dealer for details. let your dealer’s service department or anotherqualified service center do thesejobs. 7-2 “Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections” explains CAUTION: important inspections that your dealer’s service A department or another qualified service center should perform. Performing maintenancework on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying todo some jobs, you can “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products to help keep your vehicle be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance properly maintained. These products, or their work only if you have the required know-how equivalents, shouldbe used whetheryou do thework and the propertools and equipment for the job. yourself or haveit done. If you have any doubt,have a qualified technician do thework. “Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed onyour vehicle. Wheneverany maintenance is performed, be If you are skilled enough to do some work youron sure to writeit down in this part. Thiswill help you vehicle, you will probably want to get the service determine when your next maintenance should be done. information. See “Service and Owner Publications”in In addition, itis a good idea to keepyour maintenance the Index. receipts. They may be needed to qualifyyour vehicle for warranty repairs. “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. 7-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance The proper fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicleuses Services these. All parts should be replaced andall necessary Using Your Maintenance Schedule repairs done beforeyou or anyone else drives the vehicle. We at General Motors want to helpyou keep your These schedules are for vehiclesthat: vehicle ingood working condition. But wedon’t know carry passengers and cargo within recommended exactly how you’ll drive it.You may drive very short limits. You will find these limits onyour vehicle’s distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive Tire-Loading Information label. See “LoadingYour long distances all the time veryin hot, dustyweather. Vehicle” in the Index. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or are driven on reasonableroad surfaces within legal you may driveit to work, todo errands or in many driving limits. other ways. use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. Because of all the differentways people use their vehicles, maintenance needsvary. You may even need Selecting the Right Schedule more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find in theschedules in this section.So please read this First you’ll need to decide whichof the two schedulesis section and notehow you dnve. If you have any right for yourvehicle. Here’s how to decidewhich questions on how to keep your vehiclein good schedule to follow: condition, seeyour Buick dealer. This part tellsyou the maintenance servicesyou should have done andwhen you should schedule them.If you go toyour dealer foryour service needs,you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service peoplewill perform thework using genuineGM parts. 7-4 Maintenance Schedule ~ Short Trip/City Definition Short Trip/City Intervals Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Scheduleif any Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter one of these conditions is true foryour vehicle: Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication This is particularly important when outside (or 6 months, whichever occurs first).Tire Rotation. temperatures are below freezing. Every 15,000 Miles(25 000km): Air Cleaner Filter 0 Most trips include extensive idling (suchas frequent Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. driving in stop-and-go traffic). Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. FuelTank, Cap and Lines Inspection. 0 Most trips are through dusty areas. Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrieron top of Service (severe conditions only). your vehicle. Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory 0 If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi Drive Belt Inspection. or other commercial application. Every 100,000 Miles(166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire One of the reasons you should follow this scheduleif Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions Every 150,000 Miles(240 000 km): Cooling System is that these conditions cause engine oil to break Service (orevery 60 months, whichever occurs first). down soonel: These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. 7-5 Maintenance Schedule ~~ . ILong Tripmighway Definition I TripmighwayLong Intervals I Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none of the Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter conditions fromthe Short Trip/City Maintenance Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever is used for trailer towing, driven ina dusty area orused occurs first).Tire Rotation. off paved roads. Use the ShortTripKity schedule for Every 30,000 Miles(50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter these conditions. Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle highway conditions causes engine to break oil Service (severe conditions only). down slower: Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive BeltInspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark PlugWire Inspection. Spark PlugReplacement. Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Service (orevery 60 months, whichever occurs first). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to followthe complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. 7-6 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles * If your vehicle has anEngine Oil Life Monitor, the monitor (166 000 km) should be performedafter 100,000 miles will show you when to change the oil -- usually between (166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performedat your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the indicator the sameinterval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 or See “Owner Checks and Services’’ and “Periodic km) 12 months, (whichever occurs first), withoutan oil change. Maintenance Inspections” following. The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in Footnotes a dusty area be sure to change your oil every 3,000 miles The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the (5 000 km)or sooner if the CHANGE OIL SOON light California Air Resources Board has determined that the comes on. Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor when failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the oil has been changed. For more information, see the emission warranty or limit recallliability prior to the “CHANGE OIL SOONLight” in the Index. completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, + A good time to checkyour brakes is during tire urge that all recommended maintenance services be rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic performed at the indicated intervalsand the maintenance Maintenance Inspections”in Part C of this schedule. be recorded. ++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your # Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, brake calipers may require additional inspection and transaxle shift linkage,parking brake cable guidesand service, at every other tire rotation.See “Caliperffiuckle underbody contact points. Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule. 7-7 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) DATE I 0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 0 Lubricate chassis components (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) I DATE I Cl Change engine oiland filter (or every3 monms, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICEDBY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) I MILEAGE I I 7-8 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) DATE 1 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) (Also see footnote++.) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 0 Inspect air cleaner filterif you are driving industy conditions. Replace filter if necessary. + An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) MILEAGE Cl Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional infomation. (See footnote +.) 7-9 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) DATE I 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) (Also see footnote ++.) 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 7-10 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 30,000 Miles (50 000 kmj DATE I' -?' I Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote* .) MILEAGE 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) ' 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote"f) 0 Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) I ' 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). MILEAGE I An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 36,000 Miles (60,OObkm) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) c (Conti1- __ aa) 7-11 ! I I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) (Continued) Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) (Also see footnote ++.) 39,000 Miles (65 000 km) I DATE I Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) Lubricate chassis components (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 7-12 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 0 Inspect air cleaner filterif you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote?.) 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) (Also see footnote ++.) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change automatic transaxle fluidand filter if the vehicle ismainly driven ACTUAL SERVICEDBY under one or moreof these conditions: I MILEAGE I I - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F I (32 O C) orhigher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. (Continued) 7-13 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) (Continued) - When doing frequent trailer towing. = Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter donot require changing. 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICEDBY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) I MILEAGE I I 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 57,000 Miles (95 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 7-14 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage orleaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace partsas needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) 63,000 Miles (105 080 km) DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) (Continued) 7-15 ~ ~ ______~~~ ~ ~~ ~~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~~~ ~ ~~ Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) (Continued) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Rotate tires. See“Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index forproper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) DATE I i 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) I I I 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) DATE I 0 Change engineoil and filter(or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) MILEAGE 0’Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See“Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) (Also see footnote ++.) , ,..- ..., I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 0 Inspect air cleaner filterif you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) I 1 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICEDBY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) I MILEAGE I I 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote* .) I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICEDBY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) I MILEAGE I I 0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts asneeded. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 7-18 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 96,000 Miles (160 000 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 0 Lubricate chassis components (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote++.) 99,000 Miles (165 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 7-19 I Short Rip/City Maintenance Schedule I 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) DATE 0 Inspect spark plug wires. ACTUAL SERVICEDBE An Emission Control Service. I MILEAGE I I Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. 0 Change automatic transaxle fluidand filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions: - In heavy city traffic wherethe outside temperature regularly reaches90°F (32°C) orhigher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. Ij’you do notuse your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter donot require changing. 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).See “Engine Coolant”in the Index forwhat to use. MILEAGE Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap neck.and Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. 7-20 Lbng Tripmighway Maintenance Scheduh The services shown in this scheduleup to 100,000 miles and filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) ( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change. (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The servicesshown Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic without an oil and filter change. Maintenance Inspections” following. The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter Footnotes every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or soonerif the CHANGE ‘r The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the OIL SOON light comes on. Remember toreset the Oil California Air ResourcesBoard has determined thatthe Life Monitor when the oil has been changed. For more failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify information, see “CHANGE OIL SOON Light” in the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the the Index. completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, + A good time to check your brakes is during tire urge that all recommended maintenance servicesbe rotation. See “Brake System Inspection”under performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in PartC of be recorded. this schedule. # Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, ++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guidesand brake calipers may require additional inspection and underbody contact points. service, at every other tire rotation.See “Caliper/Knuckle * If your vehicle has an EngineOil Life Monitor, the Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance monitor will show you when to change the engine oil Inspections” in PartC of this schedule. 7-21 I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote *.) Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote++.) 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) I DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICEDBY An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote *.) I MILEAGE I I [7 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 7-22 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) DATE I I7 Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional infomation. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote++.) 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace partsas needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) DATE I 0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.) MILEAGE 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) (Continued) 7-23 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) (Continued) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote *.) Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: MILEAGE - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32 O C) orhigher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any ($these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. 7-24 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICEDBY: An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) I MILEAGE I I 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See“Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I 1 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) DATE I Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICEDBY An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) I MILEAGE I I Lubricate chassis components(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See“Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) (Also see footnote++.) 0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for aamageor leaks. Inspect fuel capgasket for any damage. Replace partsas needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 7-25 r~~ Long Trip/Highl ly Maintenance Schedule ’ 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) DATE Cl Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL I SERVICEDBY: I An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) MILEAGE 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) DATE 1 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 7-26 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) DATE I Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 ACTUAL SERVICEDBY An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) I MILEAGE I I Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Replace air cleanerfilter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damageor leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) DATE 0 Change engine oil and filter(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 7-27 - ,. . ._ I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) DATE I ACTUAL Inspect spark plug wires. SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. Change automatic transaxle fluid and filterif the vehicle ismainly driven under one or moreof these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90°F (32°C)or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. Ifyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system(or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for towhat use. MILEAGE Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressuretest the cooling systemand pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. 7-28 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Listed below are owner checks and services which Check the windshield washer fluid levelin the should be performed at the intervals specified to help windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if ensure the safety, dependability and emission control necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the performance of your vehicle. Index for further details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completedat once. At Least Once a Month Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown Tire Inflation Check in Part D. Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. At Each Fuel Fill See “Tires” in the Index for further details. It is important for you or a service station attendant to Cassette Deck Service per$orm these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Clean cassette deck. Cleaningshould be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems”in the Engine Oil Level Check Index for further details. Check the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details. Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant leveland add DEX-COOL@ coolant mixtureif necessary. See “Engine Coolant”in the Index for further details. 7-29 At Least Twicea Year At Least Oncea Year Restraint System Check Key Lock Cylinders Service Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are specified in Part D. working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might Body Lubrication Service keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. and latches, including those for the hood, glove box Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, door and console door. Part D tells you what to use. and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system More frequentlubrication may be required when does not need regular maintenance.) exposed to a corrosive environment. Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades, Cleaning” in the Index. Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level; addif needed. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed. 7-30 Starter Switch Check Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check CAUTION: A CAUTION: &%? When you are doing this check, the vehicle could When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below. injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room 1. Before you start, be sureyou have enough room around the vehicle. around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking Brake’’ in the Index if necessary) and the 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” regular brake. in the Index if necessary). NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, andbe NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake ready to turn off the engine immediatelyif it starts. immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the starter worksin any other position, your vehicle the regular brake, try to move the shift lever outof needs service. PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service. 7-31 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the the ignition key to LOCKin each shift lever position. parking brake. The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift 0 To check the parking brake's holding ability: With lever is in PARK (P). the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake 0 The key should come out only in LOCK. pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Parking Brakeand Automatic Transaxle PARK (P) Mechanism Check To check the PARK (P) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes. A CAUTION: Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plain water to flush any When you are aomg tms check, your vehicle corrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to could begin to move. You or others could be clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris injured and property couldbe damaged. Make cancollect. sure thereis room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. 7-32 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Exhaust System Inspection Inspections Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system.Look for broken, damaged, missingor Listed below are inspections and services which shouldbe out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring connections or other conditions which could cause a heat and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department build-up in the floor panor could let exhaustfumes into or other qualified service centerdo these jobs. Make sure the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index. any necessary repairs are completed at once. Proper proceduresto perform these servicesmay be Engine Cooling System Inspection found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner Inspect the hoses and have them replacedif they are Publications” in the Index. cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replaceas needed. Clean the outsideof the Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure Boot and Seal Inspection proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering pressure cap is recommended at leastonce a year. system for damaged, looseor missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectthe power steering Throttle System Inspection lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive and for damagedor missing parts. Replace parts as axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace needed. Replaceany components that have high effort seals if necessary. or excessivewear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables. 7-33 Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. CaliperKnuckle Maintenance Inspection If you operate your vehicle in a highly corrosive environment, as indicated by the shaded areas on the map following this text, your vehicle may require additional brake service. Refer to the appropriate GM Service Bulletin for the proper caliperinspection procedure. As necessary, caliper pins and knucklebrake pad abutments should be lubricated at every other tire rotation. Also, see your GM dealer’s service department or qualified service center foradditional information. 7-34 Part D: Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT and Lubricants Parking Brake Chassis Lubricant (GM Part NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified belowby name, Cable Guides No. 12377985 or equivalent) or part number or specificationmay be obtained from lubricant meeting requirementsof your dealer. NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. I USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Engine Oil with the American System Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint, Petroleum Institute Certified For 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent). Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity.To Automatic DEXRON@-I11Automatic determine the preferred viscosity Transaxle Transmission Fluid. for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. Key Lock Multi-Puose Lubricant, Cylinders Superlube% (GM Part 50/50 mixture of clean water No. 12346241 or equivalent). (preferably distilled) and use only GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL@ Chassis Chassis Lubricant (GM Part or Havoline@ DEX-COOL@ Lubrication No. 12377985 or equivalent) or Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in lubricant meeting requirementsof the Index. NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme11 @ Brake Fluid System (GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid). 7-35 USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Windshield GM Optikleen' Washer Solvent Fuel Door Hinge Multi-Puose Lubricant, Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) or and Rear Superlube% (GMPart equivalent. Compartment No. 12346241 or equivalent). Lid Hinges Hood Latch Lubriplate' Lubricant Aerosol Assembly, (GM Part No. 12346293 or Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Secondary Latch, equivalent) or lubricant meeting Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Pivots, Spring requirements of NLGI # 2, Anchor and Category LB or GC-LB. Release Pawl ~~ Hood and Door Multi-Puose Lubricant, Hinges Superlube% (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). E 7-36 Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed,record the Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on date, odometer reading and who performedthe service the following record pages. Also, you should retain all in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. maintenance receipts.Your owner information portfolio Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and is a convenient placeto store them. Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7-37 Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE MAINTENANCEREADING PERFORMEDSERVICED BY ~~ 7-38 (i@ Section 8 CustomerAssistance Information Here you will find outhow to contact Buickif you need assistance. This section alsotells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects. 8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8-8 Warranty Information 8-4 Customer Assistancefor Text 8-8 Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited Telephone (TTY) Users States Government 8-5 Roadside Assistance 8-9 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8-5 Canadian Roadside Assistance Canadian Government 8-6 Courtesy Transportation 8-9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8 -7 GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute 8-9 Ordering Service and Owner Publications Resolution Program in Canada Customer Satisfaction Procedure Buick dealers have the facilities, trained technicians and up-to-date information to promptly address any concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the following steps: STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager. 8-2 STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 dealership management, it appears your concern cannot In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135 be resolved by the dealership without further help, (English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish) contact the Buick Customer Relations Center by calling 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling In Bermuda, Barbados, Antiguaand the British 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122 For help outside of the United Statesand Canada, call 0 In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-1315 the following numbersas appropriate: In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 Distribution Corporation in Canada at: In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or (905) 644-4112. 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 8-3 For promptassistance, please havethe following Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance information available to givethe Customer Information booklet for addresses of GM Assism,cRepresentative:.. Overseas offices. Your name, address, home and business When contacting Buick, please remember that your telephone numbers concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That 0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available is why we suggest you follow Step Onefirst if you from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrumentpanel and visible have a concern. through the windshield.) Customer Assistance for Text Dealership name and location Telephone (TTY) Users 0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or Nature of concern speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), We encourage you to call usso we can giveyour inquiry Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users in Buick, address your inquiry to: Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Buick Motor Division Customer Relations Center 902 E. Hamilton Avenue Flint, MI 48550 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7 Roadside Assistance Our commitment to Buick owners has always included superior service through our network of over2,800 Buick dealers. Buick Premium Roadside Assistance providesan extra'measure of convenience and security. BUCK PREMIUM ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE: Provides owners with access to minor repairs or towing for disabled vehicles. Although Roadside Assistance is not a repair facility,it is a meansof A assisting customers in an emergency situation. L Takes the anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing easy access to service professionals trained to 'work with Buick owners,24 hours a day, 365 days ' a year, including weekend.s and holidays. 1 1 For details on Buick Premium Roadside Assistance, 4 please consultyour. Buick Premium Roadside Assistance 4 owner booklet included with your owner's manual. For needed assistance, call the Buick Premium Roadside Assistance toll-free hotline: 1-800-252-1112. Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered Canadian Roadside Assistance under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60000 km) new car warranty (whichever occurs first). Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. 8-5 Courtesy Transportation Because of uncertain availability, it is frequently not possible to providecustomers with the same model To Buick Motor Division,Quality Means Service -- and loaner vehicle (including optional equipment) as the service means “keeping you on the road.” vehicle the customer owns or leases and has brought in Included with your Buick new car warranty for warranty repair. If a loaner vehicle is required, please (3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), whichever occurs consult your dealership for completeprogram details first), is Courtesy Transportation, a program which and loaner caravailability in your area. will provide Buick retail and leasecustomers with: Some stateinsurance regulations make it impractical Reimbursement toward a loaner vehicle, courtesy to rentvehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you of Buick Motor Division, up to $30 a day (five are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Buick days maximum) for vehicles requiring overnight will reimburse you up to $30/day, for any documented warranty repairs. Also, reimbursement up to $30 a transportation you receive. Please consultyour dealer day (five days maximum)may be available for the for details. cost of a rental car, bus or even a cab. For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle A free one-way shuttle ride orvehicle pick-up from a Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, location up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership interim transportation may be available under the is available for those whose vehicleonly requires Courtesy Transportation program. Please consult your same daywarranty repairs. dealer for details. The Courtesy Transportation program is available onlyin the United States and Canada. NOTE: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by your Buickdealer In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for service management. information on Courtesy Transportation. Courtesy Transportation is Buick’s way of extending the Buick reserves the right to make any changes or Premium Serviceyou’ve come to expect from Buick discontinue the Courtesy Transportation program at and its over 2,800 dealers. Please review the Courtesy any time without notification. Transportation glove box card contained in your vehicle or consult your Buick dealer for details. GM Participation in an Alternative BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to Dispute Resolution Program settle automotive disputes. Thisprogram is available This program is availablein all 50 states and the District free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a of Columbia. Canadian owners referto your Warranty GM vehicle. and Owner Assistance Information booklet for If you are not satisfied after following the Customer information on the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Satisfaction Procedure,you may contact the BBB using Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the change eligibility limitationsand/or to discontinue its following address: participation in this program. BBB AUTO LINE Both Buick and your Buick dealer are committed Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. to making sure you are completely satisfiedwith 4200 Wilson Boulevard your new vehicle. Our experiencehas shown that, Suite 800 if a situation arises where you feel your concern Arlington, VA 22203- 1804 has not been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 section is very successful. To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name There may be instances wherean impartial third party and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement and a statementof the nature of your complaint. regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these other factors. disagreements, Buickvoluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. 8-7 J We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Procedure beforeyou resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt TO THE UNITED STATES to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If GOVERNMENT this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could be scheduled where eligible customers may present their cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should case toan impartial third-party arbitrator. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic The arbitrator will make a decision which you may Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to accept orreject. If you accept the decision, GM will be notifying General Motors. bound by that decision. The entire disputeresolution If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an procedure should ordinarily take about40 days from the investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in time you file a claim until a decision is made. a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy Some statelaws may require you to use this program campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved before filinga claim with a state-run arbitration program in individual problems between you, your dealer or or in the courts. For further information, contact the General Motors. BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Buick Customer To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Assistance Center at 1-800-521-7300. Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Warranty Information Washington, D.C. area) or write to: Your vehicle comes witha separate warranty booklet NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation that containsdetailed warranty information. Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 8-8 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) TO THE CANADIAN or 1-800-263-7854 (French).Or, write: General Motorsof Canada Limited GOVERNMENT Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle 1908 Colonel Sam Drive has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Ordering Service and Owner Transport Canada Publications in Canada Box 8880 Service manuals, owner’s manualsand other service Ottawa, Ontario K1G352 literature are available for purchase forall current and REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS past model General Motorsvehicles. TO GENERAL MOTORS The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this,we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, orwrite: Buick Motor Division Customer Relations Center 902 E. Hamilton Avenue Flint, MI 48550 1998 BUICK SERVICE PUBLICATIONSORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this bookand mailing it in withyour check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.) CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 BUCK SERVICE MANUALS OWNER’S INFORMATION Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, intended to provide basic operational information about the electrical, steering, body, etc. vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 Schedule for all models. TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and UNIT REPAIR MANUAL Warranty Booklet. This manual provides information on unit repair service RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00 procedures, adjustments and specifications for the Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. 1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $1 0.00 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS SERVICE BULLETINS Service Publications are available for current and past Service Bulletins give technical service information needed model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356 THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO: Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover) ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal (NOTE: For Credit Card HoldersOnly) service. If further information is needed, write to the address sa own below or call 1-800-782-4356 1-800-782-4356.Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return (Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST) information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1-31 3-865-5927 against the original order. NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. s Mail completed order form to: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 H For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation. I' p (CUSTOMER'S NAME) (ATTENTION) T (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) (STATE) (ZIP CODE) DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. 0 AREA CODE A-BUI-ORD98 *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) are to make checks payable in US. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11 50 plus the U.S. order processing. & NOTES 8-12 Section 9 Index Air Bag ...... 1-18 Armrest. Storage ...... 2-52 How Does it Restrain ...... 1-22 Ashtrays ...... 2-53 How it Works ...... 1-20 Audio Equipment. Adding ...... 3-34 Location ...... 1-20 Audio. Steering Wheel Touch Controls ...... 3-32 Readiness Light ...... 1.20, 2.60 Audio Systems ...... 3-11 Servicing ...... 1-24 Automatic Dimming/Heated Outside Mirror ...... 2-51 What Makes it Inflate ...... 1-22 AutomaticTransaxle ...... 2-24 What Will You See After it Inflates ...... 1-23 Check ...... 7-30 When Should it Inflate ...... 1-22 Fluid ...... 6-18 Aircleaner ...... 6-15 Operation ...... 2-24 Air Conditioning ...... 3 -6 Overdrive ...... 2-26 Air Conditioning Refrigerants ...... 6-60 Park Mechanism Check ...... 7-32 Air Control. Climate Control System ...... 3-2. 3-4 Shifting ...... 2-24 Alarm. Instant. Keyless Entry ...... 2-10 Alarm. Universal Theft-Deterrent ...... 2- 16 Alignment and Balance. Tire ...... 6-44 Battery ...... 6-29 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ...... 6-5 1 Jump Starting ...... 5-3 Antenna. Heated Backlite ...... 3-36 Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-12 Antifreeze ...... 6-20 Rundown Protection ...... 2-45 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 2-60 Brake System Warning Light ...... 2-62. 4-7 Warnings ...... 5-3 Brakes ...... 4-7 BBB Auto Line ...... 8-7 Anti-Theft. Radio ...... 3-30 Belt. Engine Accessory ...... 6-61 AppearanceCare ...... 6-46 Better Business Bureau Mediation ...... 8-7 Appearance Care Materials ...... 6-53 Blizzard. Driving In ...... 4-27 Arbitration Program ...... 8-7 9-1 Brake Chains. Tire ...... 6-46 Adjustment ...... 6-29 Change Oil Soon Light ...... 2-68 Anti-lock System Warning Light ...... 2.62. 4.7 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-23 Fluid ...... 6-26 Check Engine Light ...... 2-64 Master Cylinder ...... 6-26 Check Oil Level Light ...... 2-68 Parking ...... 2-27 Checlung Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-50 PedalTravel ...... 6-29 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 6-52 Replacing System Parts ...... 6-29 Child Restraints ...... 1-35 System Warning Light ...... 2-61 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position ...... 1-41 Trailer ...... 4-35 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position ...... 1-43 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check ...... 2.24. 7.3 1 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-45 Wear ...... 6-28 TopStrap ...... 1-40 Brakes. Anti-Lock ...... 4-7 WheretoPut ...... 1-39 Braking ...... 4-6 Cigarette Lighter ...... 2-53 Braking in Emergencies ...... 4- 10 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ...... 6-55 Break-In. New Vehicle ...... 2- 19 Cleaner, Air ...... 6-15 Brightness Control ...... 2-42 Cleaning BTSI Check ...... 2.24. 7-31 Aluminum Wheels ...... 6-51 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-30 ExteriorLampsLenses ...... 6-51 Fabric ...... 6-47 Glass Surfaces ...... 6-49 Canadian Roadside Assistance ...... 8-5 Inside of Your Vehicle ...... 6-47 Capacities and Specifications ...... 6-60 Instrument Panel ...... 6-49 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-32, 4-28 Interior Plastic Components ...... 6-49 Cassette Deck Service ...... 7-29 Leather ...... 6-48 Cassette Tape Player ...... 3.16,3.19. 3.27 Outside of Your Vehicle ...... 6-50 Care ...... 3-34 Special Problems ...... 6-48 Errors ...... 3.16.3.20. 3.27 Stains ...... 6-48 Center Passenger Position ...... 1-25 Tires ...... 6-52 Certification Label ...... 4-30 Vinyl ...... 6-48 Certificatioflire Label ...... 4-30 Windshield and Wiper Blades ...... 6-50 Chains. Safety ...... 4-35 Climate Control, SteeringWheel Touch Control ...... 3-11 9-2 Climate Control System ...... 3-2 Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Clock. Setting the ...... 3- 12 Defogger. Rear Window ...... 3-10 Coinholder ...... 2-52 Defogging ...... 3-9 Comfort Controls ...... 3- 1 Defrosting ...... 3-9 Compact Disc Care ...... 3-35 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 2-43 Compact Disc Player ...... 3-23. 3.28 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 2-43 Care ...... 3-35 DelayedLoclung ...... 2-6 Errors ...... 3.23. 3.29 Personal Choice Programming ...... 2-6 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-36 Dimensions. Vehicle ...... 6-61 ConsoleStorage ...... 2-52 Dolby B Noise Reduction ...... 3.17.3.20.3.28 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-6 DoorLocks ...... 2-4 ConvenienceNet ...... 2-52 DriverPosition ...... 1-10 Convex Outside Mirror ...... 2-5 1 Driving Coolant ...... 6-20 City ...... 4-20 Heater. Engine ...... 2-22 Defensive ...... 4-2 RecoveryTank ...... 5-17 Drunken ...... 4-3 Cooling System ...... 5- 15 Freeway ...... 4-21 Cornering Lamps ...... 2-41 InaBlizzard ...... 4-27 Courtesy Lamps ...... 2-43 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-5 Courtesy Transportation ...... 8-6 IntheRain ...... 4-17 CruiseControl ...... 2-37 Night ...... 4-15 Cupholders ...... 2-52 OnCurves ...... 4-10 Customer Assistance forText Telephone Users ...... 8-4 On Grades While Towing a Trailer ...... 4-37 Customer Assistance Information ...... 8- 1 On Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-23 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 8-2 OnSnowandIce ...... 4-26 Throughwater ...... 4-19 WetRoads ...... 4-17 Damage. Finish ...... 6-52 Winter ...... 4-25 Damage. Sheet Metal ...... 6-52 With a Trailer ...... 4-35 Daytime Running Lamps ...... 2-41 Drunken Driving ...... 4-3 Dead Battery ...... 5-3 Dual Automatic ComforTemp Climate Control ...... 3-3 Defects. Reporting Safety ...... 8-8 9-3 Electrical Equipment. Adding ...... 3.34. 6-54 Whentochange ...... 6-14 Electrical System ...... 6-54 Entry Lighting. Delayed ...... 2-43 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror ...... 2-46 Ethanol ...... 6-4 With Compass ...... 2-47 Exhaust. Engine ...... 2-32 Electronic Level Control ...... 4-3 I Exit Lighting. Delayed ...... 2-43 Electronic Touch Climate Control ...... 3-2 Express-Down Window ...... 2-34 Engine ...... 6-10 Exterior Lamps ...... 2-40 Accessory Belt ...... 6-61 Coolant ...... 6-20 Coolant Heater ...... 2-22 Fabric Cleaning ...... 6-47 Coolant Level Check ...... 7-29 Fan Control. Climate Control System ...... 3-2. 3-4 Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 2-64 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ...... 6-8 Coolant Temperature Warning Light ...... 2-63 Filling Your Tank ...... 6-5 Exhaust ...... 2-32 Filter. Air ...... 6-15 Fuse Block (Driver’s Side) ...... 6-56 Filter. Engine Oil ...... 6-14 Fuse Block (Passenger’s Side) ...... 6-58 Finishcare ...... 6-51 Identification ...... 6-54 Finish Damage ...... 6-52 OilLevelCheck ...... 7-29 First Gear. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-27 Overheating ...... 5-13 Flashers. Hazard Warning ...... 5-2 Running While Parked ...... 2-32 Flat Tire. Changing ...... 5-23 Specifications ...... 6-60 Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-35 StartingYour ...... 2-21 Foreign Countries. Fuel ...... 6-5.. Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing ...... 4-38 FrenchLanguageManual ...... 11 Engineoil ...... 6-11 FrontTowing ...... 5-10 Adding ...... 6-12 Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement ...... 6-32 Additives ...... 6-14 Fuel ...... 6-3 Checking ...... 6-12 Canada ...... 6-3 Life Monitor ...... 2-68 Filling a Portable Container ...... 6-8 Pressure Gage ...... 2-66 FillingYourTank ...... 6-5 Pressure Light ...... 2-66 Gage ...... 2-69 Used ...... 6-15 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-5 What Kind to Use ...... 6-13 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 6-55 9-4 Gages Ignition Positions ...... 2-19 Engine Coolant Temperature ...... 2-64 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ...... 7-32 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 2-66 Illuminated Entry ...... 2-43 Fuel ...... 2-69 Inflation. Tire ...... 6-39 GAWR ...... 4-30 Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror ...... 2-46 Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-24 Inspections ...... 7-33 GloveBox ...... 2-51 Brakesystem ...... 7-34 Gross Axle Weight Rating ...... 4-30 Caliper/Knuckle ...... 7-34 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...... 4-30.. Engine Cooling System ...... 7-33 en Franqais Guide en ...... 11 Exhaust System ...... 7-33 GVWR ...... 4-30 Front Drive Axle Boot ...... 7-33 Front Drive Axle Seal ...... 7-33 Steering ...... 7-33 Halogen Bulbs ...... 6-30 Suspension ...... 7-33 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 5-2 Throttle System ...... 7-33 Head Restraints ...... 1-4 Instrumentpanel ...... 2-54 Headlamps ...... 2-40 Brightness Control ...... 2-42 Aiming ...... 6-36 Cleaning ...... 6-49 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-30 Cluster ...... 2-56.2-57 HighLow Beam Changer ...... 2-36 Interior Lamps ...... 2-42 On Reminder ...... 2-41 Wiring ...... 6-55 Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance ...... 8-4 Jack . Tire ...... 5-26 Heating ...... 3-7 Jump Starting ...... 5-3 High-Beam Headlamps ...... 2-36 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-23 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-23 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...... 7-30 Hitches, Trailer ...... 4-34 Key Reminder Warning ...... 2- 15.2-20 Hood Keyless Entry System ...... 2-8 Checking Things Under ...... 6-8 Personal Choice Features ...... 2-10 Release ...... 6-9 Keys ...... 2-2 Horn ...... 2-34 Hydroplaning ...... 4-19 9-5 Labels Traction Control System Warning ...... 2.63. 4.9 Certification ...... 4-30 Traction Off Warning ...... 4-9 Certificatioflire ...... 4-30 Loading YourVehicle ...... 4-29 Service Parts Identification ...... 6-54 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Tire-Loading Information ...... 4-29 Locks ...... 2-4 Vehicle Identification Number ...... 6-54 Cylinders ...... 7-30 Lamps ...... 2-40 DelayedLocking ...... 2-6 Courtesy ...... 2-43 Door ...... 2-4 Entry Lighting, Delayed ...... 2-43 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ...... 7-32 Exit Lighting. Delayed ...... 2-43 Key Lock Cylinder Service ...... 7-30 Exterior ...... 2-40 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Illuminated Entry ...... 2-43 Memory Door ...... 2-5 Interior ...... 2-42 PowerDoor ...... 2-5 OnReminder ...... 2-41 Rear Door Security ...... 2-7 Perimeter Lighting ...... 2-43 Trunk ...... 2-13 Theater Dimming ...... 2-43 Window ...... 2-34 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-8 LowFuelLight ...... 2-70 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ...... 2-30 Lubricants and Fluids ...... 7-35 Light Sensor. Twilight Sentinel ...... 2-42 Lubrication Service. Body ...... 7-30 Lighter ...... 2-53 Lights Air Bag Readiness ...... 1-20. 2-60 Magnasteer ...... 4. 10 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...... 2-62. 4-7 Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts ...... 6-61 Battery Warning ...... 2-60 Maintenance Record ...... 7-37 Brake System Warning ...... 2-61 Maintenance Schedule ...... 7-1 ChangeOilSoon ...... 2-68 Long Tripmighway Definition ...... 7-6 CheckEngine ...... 2-64 Long Trip/Highway Intervals ...... 7-6 CheckOilLevel ...... 2-68 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-29 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ...... 2-63 Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-33 Engine Oil Pressure Light ...... 2-66 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-35 LowFuel ...... 2-70 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-4 Oil Pressure ...... 2-66 Short Trip/City Definition ...... 7-5 Safety Belt Reminder ...... 2-59 Short Trip/City Intervals ...... 7-5 9-6 Maintenance. Underbody ...... 6-52 Oil. Engine ...... 6-11 Maintenance When Trailer Towing ...... 4-38 Oil Level Warning Light ...... 2-68 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 2-64 Oil Pressure Light ...... 2-66 ManualFrontSeat ...... 1-2 Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-26 Manual Remote Control Mirror ...... 2-50 Overheating Engine ...... 5-13 Maxifuse@/Relay Center ...... 6-55 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-29 Memory Door Locks ...... 2-5 Owner Publications. Ordering ...... 8-10 Personal Choice Programming ...... 2-5 Methanol ...... 6-4 Mirrors ...... 2-46 Paint Spotting. Chemical ...... 6-52 Automatic Dimmingmeated Outside...... 2-5 1 Park Convex Outside ...... 2-51 AutomaticTransaxle ...... 2-24 Daymight Rearview with Reading Lamps ...... 2-46 Shifting Into ...... 2-28 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview ...... 2-46 Shifting Out of ...... 2-31 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview With Compass . 2-47 Parking Manual Remote Control ...... 2-50 AtNight ...... 2-15 Power Remote Control ...... 2-50 Brake ...... 2-27 Visor Vanity ...... 2-53 Brake Mechanism Check ...... 7-32 MMT ...... 6-4 Lots ...... 2-15 Multifunction Lever ...... 2-35 Over Things That Bum ...... 2-31 Passenger Temperature Control ...... 3-11 Passing ..&...... 4-13 Net. Convenience ...... 2-52 PASS-Key I1 ...... 2-17 Neutral. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-25 Perimeter Lighting ...... 2-43 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-19 Personal Choice Programming ...... 2-43 Nightvision ...... 4-16 Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-33 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 6-6 1 Personal Choice Programming Delayed Locking ...... 2-6 Memory Door Locks ...... 2-5 Odometer ...... 2-58 Perimeter Lighting ...... 2-43 Odometer. Trip ...... 2-58 SecurityFeedback ...... 2-11 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4- 12 9-7 Power Reclining Front Seatbacks ...... 1-3 DoorLocks ...... 2-5 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-35 OptionFuses ...... 6-55 Recovery Tank. Coolant ...... 5-17 Remote Control Mirror ...... 2-50 Refrigerants.Air Conditioning ...... 6-60 Seat ...... 1-3 Remote Steering ...... 4-10 Trunk Release ...... 2-13 Steering Fluid ...... 6-24 Trunk Release Lockout ...... 2-14 Windows ...... 2-33 Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-8 Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ...... 1- 17 InstantAlarm ...... 2-10 Problems on the Road ...... 5- 1 Personal Choice ...... 2-10 Publications. Service and Owner ...... 8-9 Resynchronization ...... 2-10 SecurityFeedback ...... 2-11 Replacement Radiator ...... 5-20 Bulbs ...... 6-59 Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 6-23 Parts ...... 6-61 Radio Reception ...... 3-33 Wheel ...... 6-44 Radios ...... 3.12.3.14.3.17.3.21. 3.25 Replacing Safety Belts ...... 1-50 Rain. Driving In ...... 4- 17 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 8-8 Reading Lamps ...... 2.44.2.45 Restraints Rear Checking ...... 1-50 Door Security Locks ...... 2-7 Child ...... 1-35 Outside Seat Position ...... 1-26 Head ...... 1-4 Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...... 1-29 Replacing Parts After a Crash ...... 1-50 Seatpassengers ...... 1-26 Systemcheck ...... 7-30 Towing ...... 5-11 Reverse. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-25 Turn Signal Bulb Replacement ...... 6-35 Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-18 Window Defogger ...... 3 .10 Roadside Assistance ...... 8-5 Rearview Mirror ...... 2-46 Roadside Assistance. Canadian ...... 8-5 Electrochromic Daymight ...... 2-46 Rocking YourVehicle ...... 5-37 Inside Daymight with Reading Lamps ...... 2-46 Rotation.Tires ...... 6-40 With Compass ...... 2-47 9-8 Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-50 Reclining Front ...... 1-3 Safety Belts ...... 1-5 Seatcontrols ...... 1-2 Adults ...... 1-10 Securing a Child Restraint ...... 1.41.1.43. 1-45 Care ...... 6-49 Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-26 Center Passenger Position ...... 1-25 Security Feedback ...... 2-11 Children ...... 1-32 Personal Choice Programming ...... 2-11 Driver Position ...... 1. 10 Security System ...... 2-17 Extender ...... 1-50 Service ...... 6-2 How to Wear Properly ...... 1. 10 Bulletins. Ordering ...... 8-10 Incorrect Usage ...... 1.13,1.48. 1-49 Manuals. Ordering ...... 8-10 LapBelt ...... 1-25 Parts Identification Label ...... 6-54 Lap-Shoulder ...... 1.10. 1-27 Publications. Ordering ...... 8-10 Larger Children ...... 1-47 Work. Doing Your Own ...... 6-2 Questions and Answers ...... 1-9 Service and Appearance Care ...... 6-1 Rear Comfort Guides ...... 1-29 Service and Owner Publications ...... 8-9 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ...... 1-26 Service Publications ...... 8-9 Rear Seat Passengers ...... 1-26 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 1-24 Reminder Light ...... 2-59 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 6-52 Replacing After a Crash ...... 1-50 Shifting Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1 .18 Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-24 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...... 1 . 12 Into PARK (P) ...... 2-28 Smaller Children and Babies ...... 1-32 OutofPARK(P) ...... 2-31 Use During Pregnancy ...... 1. 17 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...... 1-12 WhyTheyWork ...... 1-6 Signaling Turns ...... 2-35 SafetyChains ...... 4-35 Skidding ...... 4-14 Safety Defects. Reporting ...... 8-8... Sound Equipment. Adding ...... 3-34 Safety Warnings and Symbols ...... 111 Spare Tire. Compact ...... 5-36 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-4 Specifications and Capacities ...... 6-60 Seats Specifications. Engine ...... 6-60 ManualFront ...... 1-2 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance ...... 8-4 Power ...... 1-3 Speedometer ...... 2-58 Restraint Systems ...... 1. 1 SRS ...... 1-18 9-9 Stains. Cleaning ...... 6-48 Time. Setting the ...... 3-12 Starter Switch Check ...... 7-3 1 Tire Chains ...... 6-46 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-21 Tire Loading ...... 4-29 Steam ...... 5-13 Tire-Loading Information Label ...... 4-29 Steering ...... 4-10 Tires ...... 6-38 In Emergencies ...... 4- 11 Alignment and Balance ...... 6-44 Magnasteer” ...... 4-10 BuyingNew ...... 6-42 Power ...... 4-10 Chains ...... 6-46 Tips ...... 4-10 Changing a Flat ...... 5-23 Wheel. Tilt ...... 2-34 Cleaning ...... 6-52 Wheel Touch Controls ...... 3-1 1. 3-32 Compact Spare ...... 5-36 Storage Compartments ...... 2-5 1 Inflation ...... 6-39 Storage. Vehicle ...... 6-29 Inflation Check ...... 7-29 Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow ...... 5-37 Inspection and Rotation ...... 6-40 Sun Visors ...... 2-53 Loading ...... 4-29 Supplemental Restraint System ...... 1- 18 Pressure ...... 6-39 Symbols. Vehicle ...... v Temperature ...... 6-44 Traction ...... 6-43 Treadwear ...... 6-43 Tachometer ...... 2-58 Uniform Quality Grading ...... 6-43 Taillamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-33 Wear Indicators ...... 6-41 TapePlayerCare ...... 3-34 Wheel Replacement ...... 6-44 Temperature Control. Climate Control System ..... 3-2. 3-4 When It’s Time for New ...... 6-41 Temperature Control. Passenger ...... 3- 11 TopStrap ...... 1-40 TheaterDimming ...... 2-43 TorqueLock ...... 2-30 Theft ...... 2-15 Torque, Wheel Nut ...... 5-33, 6-60 Theft-Deterrent Alarm System ...... 2- 16 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-31 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-30 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 5-8 THEFTLOCK” ...... 3-30 Traction Thermostat ...... 6-23 Control System ...... 4-9 Third Gear. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-26 Control System Warning Light ...... 2-63, 4-9 Tilt Steering Wheel ...... 2-34 Off Warning Light ...... 4-9 9-10 Trailer Underbody Flushing Service ...... 7-32 Brakes ...... 4-35 Underbody Maintenance ...... 6-52 Driving on Grades ...... 4-37 Universal Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-16 Driving with ...... 4-35 Engine Cooling When Towing ...... 4-38 I-Zltches ...... 4-34 Vehicle Maintenance When Towing ...... 4-38 Control ...... 4-6 ParkingonHills ...... 4-37 Damage Warnings ...... iv Safety Chains ...... 4-35 Dimensions ...... 6-61 Tongueweight ...... 4-33 Identification Number ...... 6-54 Total Weight on Tires ...... 4-34 Loading ...... 4-29 Towing ...... 4-31 Storage ...... 6-29 Turnsignals ...... 4-36 Ventilation System ...... 3-8 Weight ...... 4-33 Visor Vanity Mirrors ...... 2-53 Transaxle Fluid. Automatic ...... 6- 18 Visors. Sun ...... 2-53 Transmitters. Matching to Your Vehicle ...... 2-12 VoltageGage ...... 2-61 Transmitters. Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-8 Transportation. Courtesy ...... 8-6 warning Devices ...... 5-3 Trip Odometer ...... 2-58 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ...... 2-59 TrLlnk Warranty Information ...... 8-8 Lock ...... 2-13 Washer Fluid. Windshield ...... 6-24 Release Lockout. Remote ...... 2- 14 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 6-50 Release. Remote ...... 2- 13 Weatherstrips ...... 6-50 SecurityOverride ...... 2-14 Wheel TTYUsers ...... 8- 4 Alignment ...... 6-44 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator ...... 2-35 Nut Torque ...... 5.33.6.60 Turn Signal. Front. Bulb Replacement ...... 6-32 Replacement ...... 6-44 Turn Signal On Chime ...... 2-36 Wheel Cover Removal ...... 5-26 Turn Signal. Rear. Bulb Replacement ...... 6-35 Wheel Nut Cap Removal ...... 5-26 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ...... 2-35 Wire Wheel Cover Removal ...... 5-28 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer ...... 4-36 Wrench ...... 5-26 Twilight Sentinel ...... 2-42 9-11 WindowLock ...... 2-34 Blade Replacement ...... 6-38 Windows ...... 2-33 Fuses ...... 6-55 Express-Down ...... 2-34 Winter Driving ...... 4-25 Power ...... 2-33 WiperBladeCheck ...... 7-30 WindshieldWasher ...... 2-37 Wiper Blades. Cleaning ...... 6-50 Fluid ...... 6-24 Wiring. Headlamp ...... 6-55 Fluid Level Check ...... 7-29 WreckerTowing ...... 5-8 Windshield Wiper ...... 2-36 Wrench. Wheel ...... 5-26 Bladecleaning ...... 6-50 9-12 Firing Orde rhermos"-' at s to Opr- ? ower A . Rear iread retailed look at t's Under the Hc I Fuel Use unleaded gas only.